<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"><title>The Bugzilla Guide - 4.4.11 Release</title><link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="../../style.css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.78.1"><meta name="description" content="This is the documentation for Bugzilla, a bug-tracking system from mozilla.org. Bugzilla is an enterprise-class piece of software that tracks millions of bugs and issues for hundreds of organizations around the world. The most current version of this document can always be found on the Bugzilla Documentation Page."><meta name="keywords" content="Bugzilla, Guide, installation, FAQ, administration, integration, MySQL, Mozilla, webtools"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="book"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="index"></a>The Bugzilla Guide - 4.4.11
Release</h1></div><div><div class="authorgroup"><h3 class="corpauthor">The Bugzilla Team</h3></div></div><div><p class="pubdate">2015-12-22</p></div><div><div class="abstract"><p class="title"><b>Abstract</b></p><p>
This is the documentation for Bugzilla, a
bug-tracking system from mozilla.org.
Bugzilla is an enterprise-class piece of software
that tracks millions of bugs and issues for hundreds of
organizations around the world.
</p><p>
The most current version of this document can always be found on the
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/docs/" target="_top">Bugzilla
Documentation Page</a>.
</p></div></div></div><hr></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#about">1. About This Guide</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#copyright">1.1. Copyright Information</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#disclaimer">1.2. Disclaimer</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#newversions">1.3. New Versions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#credits">1.4. Credits</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#conventions">1.5. Document Conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#installing-bugzilla">2. Installing Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation">2.1. Installation</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perl">2.1.1. Perl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-database">2.1.2. Database Engine</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-webserver">2.1.3. Web Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-bzfiles">2.1.4. Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perlmodules">2.1.5. Perl Modules</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-MTA">2.1.6. Mail Transfer Agent (MTA)</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#using-mod_perl-with-bugzilla">2.1.7. Installing Bugzilla on mod_perl</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#configuration">2.2. Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#localconfig">2.2.1. localconfig</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#database-engine">2.2.2. Database Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648076272">2.2.3. checksetup.pl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#http">2.2.4. Web server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-config-bugzilla">2.2.5. Bugzilla</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#extraconfig">2.3. Optional Additional Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354647978320">2.3.1. Bug Graphs</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation-whining-cron">2.3.2. The Whining Cron</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation-whining">2.3.3. Whining</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#apache-addtype">2.3.4. Serving Alternate Formats with the right MIME type</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#multiple-bz-dbs">2.4. Multiple Bugzilla databases with a single installation</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-specific">2.5. OS-Specific Installation Notes</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-win32">2.5.1. Microsoft Windows</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-macosx">2.5.2. <span class="productname">Mac OS X</span>™</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-linux">2.5.3. Linux/BSD Distributions</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#nonroot">2.6. UNIX (non-root) Installation Notes</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655437216">2.6.1. Introduction</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655434976">2.6.2. MySQL</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655413296">2.6.3. Perl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perlmodules-nonroot">2.6.4. Perl Modules</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655398464">2.6.5. HTTP Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655391456">2.6.6. Bugzilla</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade">2.7. Upgrading to New Releases</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-before">2.7.1. Before You Upgrade</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-files">2.7.2. Getting The New Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-completion">2.7.3. Completing Your Upgrade</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-notifications">2.7.4. Automatic Notifications of New Releases</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#administration">3. Administering Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">3.1. Bugzilla Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-requiredsettings">3.1.1. Required Settings</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-admin-policies">3.1.2. Administrative Policies</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-user-authentication">3.1.3. User Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-attachments">3.1.4. Attachments</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bug-change-policies">3.1.5. Bug Change Policies</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bugfields">3.1.6. Bug Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bugmoving">3.1.7. Bug Moving</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-dependency-graphs">3.1.8. Dependency Graphs</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-group-security">3.1.9. Group Security</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bzldap">3.1.10. LDAP Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bzradius">3.1.11. RADIUS Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-email">3.1.12. Email</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-patchviewer">3.1.13. Patch Viewer</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-querydefaults">3.1.14. Query Defaults</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-shadowdatabase">3.1.15. Shadow Database</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#admin-usermatching">3.1.16. User Matching</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#useradmin">3.2. User Administration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#defaultuser">3.2.1. Creating the Default User</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#manageusers">3.2.2. Managing Other Users</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#classifications">3.3. Classifications</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#products">3.4. Products</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#create-product">3.4.1. Creating New Products</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-products">3.4.2. Editing Products</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#comps-vers-miles-products">3.4.3. Adding or Editing Components, Versions and Target Milestones</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#product-group-controls">3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#components">3.5. Components</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#versions">3.6. Versions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#milestones">3.7. Milestones</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-overview">3.8. Flags</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-simpleexample">3.8.1. A Simple Example</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-about">3.8.2. About Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flag-askto">3.8.3. Using flag requests</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flag-types">3.8.4. Two Types of Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-admin">3.8.5. Administering Flags</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#keywords">3.9. Keywords</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#custom-fields">3.10. Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#add-custom-fields">3.10.1. Adding Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-custom-fields">3.10.2. Editing Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#delete-custom-fields">3.10.3. Deleting Custom Fields</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values">3.11. Legal Values</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values-list">3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values-delete">3.11.2. Deleting legal values</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bug_status_workflow">3.12. Bug Status Workflow</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#voting">3.13. Voting</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#quips">3.14. Quips</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#groups">3.15. Groups and Group Security</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#create-groups">3.15.1. Creating Groups</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-groups">3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#users-and-groups">3.15.3. Assigning Users to Groups</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648300480">3.15.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#sanitycheck">3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#security">4. Bugzilla Security</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os">4.1. Operating System</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-ports">4.1.1. TCP/IP Ports</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-accounts">4.1.2. System User Accounts</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-chroot">4.1.3. The <code class="filename">chroot</code> Jail</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-webserver">4.2. Web server</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-webserver-access">4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-bugzilla">4.3. Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-bugzilla-charset">4.3.1. Prevent users injecting malicious Javascript</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#using">5. Using Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#using-intro">5.1. Introduction</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#myaccount">5.2. Create a Bugzilla Account</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bug_page">5.3. Anatomy of a Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#lifecycle">5.4. Life Cycle of a Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#query">5.5. Searching for Bugs</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#boolean">5.5.1. Boolean Charts</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#quicksearch">5.5.2. Quicksearch</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#casesensitivity">5.5.3. Case Sensitivity in Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#list">5.5.4. Bug Lists</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#individual-buglists">5.5.5. Adding/removing tags to/from bugs</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bugreports">5.6. Filing Bugs</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#fillingbugs">5.6.1. Reporting a New Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cloningbugs">5.6.2. Clone an Existing Bug</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#attachments">5.7. Attachments</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#patchviewer">5.7.1. Patch Viewer</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#hintsandtips">5.8. Hints and Tips</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354649509344">5.8.1. Autolinkification</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#commenting">5.8.2. Comments</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#comment-wrapping">5.8.3. Server-Side Comment Wrapping</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#dependencytree">5.8.4. Dependency Tree</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#timetracking">5.9. Time Tracking Information</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#userpreferences">5.10. User Preferences</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#generalpreferences">5.10.1. General Preferences</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#emailpreferences">5.10.2. Email Preferences</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#savedsearches">5.10.3. Saved Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#accountpreferences">5.10.4. Name and Password</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#permissionsettings">5.10.5. Permissions</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#reporting">5.11. Reports and Charts</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#reports">5.11.1. Reports</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#charts">5.11.2. Charts</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags">5.12. Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining">5.13. Whining</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-overview">5.13.1. The Event</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-schedule">5.13.2. Whining Schedule</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-query">5.13.3. Whining Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648282208">5.13.4. Saving Your Changes</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></dd><dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#customization">6. Customizing Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#extensions">6.1. Bugzilla Extensions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-skins">6.2. Custom Skins</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-templates">6.3. Template Customization</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-directory">6.3.1. Template Directory Structure</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-method">6.3.2. Choosing a Customization Method</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-edit">6.3.3. How To Edit Templates</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-formats">6.3.4. Template Formats and Types</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-specific">6.3.5. Particular Templates</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-http-accept">6.3.6. Configuring Bugzilla to Detect the User's Language</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-change-permissions">6.4. Customizing Who Can Change What</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#integration">6.5. Integrating Bugzilla with Third-Party Tools</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#troubleshooting">A. Troubleshooting</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#general-advice">A.1. General Advice</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-testserver">A.2. The Apache web server is not serving Bugzilla pages</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-perlmodule">A.3. I installed a Perl module, but
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> claims it's not installed!</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-dbdSponge">A.4. DBD::Sponge::db prepare failed</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#paranoid-security">A.5. cannot chdir(/var/spool/mqueue)</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-relogin-everyone">A.6. Everybody is constantly being forced to relogin</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-index">A.7. <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> doesn't show up unless specified in the URL</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-passwd-encryption">A.8.
checksetup.pl reports "Client does not support authentication protocol
requested by server..."
</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#patches">B. Contrib</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cmdline">B.1. Command-line Search Interface</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cmdline-bugmail">B.2. Command-line 'Send Unsent Bug-mail' tool</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#install-perlmodules-manual">C. Manual Installation of Perl Modules</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-instructions">C.1. Instructions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-download">C.2. Download Locations</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-optional">C.3. Optional Modules</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#gfdl">D. GNU Free Documentation License</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-0">D.0. Preamble</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-1">D.1. Applicability and Definition</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-2">D.2. Verbatim Copying</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-3">D.3. Copying in Quantity</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-4">D.4. Modifications</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-5">D.5. Combining Documents</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-6">D.6. Collections of Documents</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-7">D.7. Aggregation with Independent Works</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-8">D.8. Translation</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-9">D.9. Termination</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-10">D.10. Future Revisions of this License</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-howto">D.. How to use this License for your documents</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="glossary"><a href="#glossary">Glossary</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="list-of-figures"><p><b>List of Figures</b></p><dl><dt>5.1. <a href="#lifecycle-image">Lifecycle of a Bugzilla Bug</a></dt></dl></div><div class="list-of-examples"><p><b>List of Examples</b></p><dl><dt>A.1. <a href="#trbl-relogin-everyone-share">Examples of urlbase/cookiepath pairs for sharing login cookies</a></dt><dt>A.2. <a href="#trbl-relogin-everyone-restrict">Examples of urlbase/cookiepath pairs to restrict the login cookie</a></dt></dl></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="about"></a>Chapter 1. About This Guide</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#copyright">1.1. Copyright Information</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#disclaimer">1.2. Disclaimer</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#newversions">1.3. New Versions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#credits">1.4. Credits</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#conventions">1.5. Document Conventions</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="copyright"></a>1.1. Copyright Information</h2></div></div></div><p>This document is copyright (c) 2000-2015 by the various
Bugzilla contributors who wrote it.</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation
License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the
Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no
Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of
the license is included in <a class="xref" href="#gfdl" title="Appendix D. GNU Free Documentation License">Appendix D, <i>GNU Free Documentation License</i></a>.
</p></blockquote></div><p>
If you have any questions regarding this document, its
copyright, or publishing this document in non-electronic form,
please contact the Bugzilla Team.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="disclaimer"></a>1.2. Disclaimer</h2></div></div></div><p>
No liability for the contents of this document can be accepted.
Follow the instructions herein at your own risk.
This document may contain errors
and inaccuracies that may damage your system, cause your partner
to leave you, your boss to fire you, your cats to
pee on your furniture and clothing, and global thermonuclear
war. Proceed with caution.
</p><p>
Naming of particular products or brands should not be seen as
endorsements, with the exception of the term "GNU/Linux". We
wholeheartedly endorse the use of GNU/Linux; it is an extremely
versatile, stable,
and robust operating system that offers an ideal operating
environment for Bugzilla.
</p><p>
Although the Bugzilla development team has taken great care to
ensure that all exploitable bugs have been fixed, security holes surely
exist in any piece of code. Great care should be taken both in
the installation and usage of this software. The Bugzilla development
team members assume no liability for your use of Bugzilla. You have
the source code, and are responsible for auditing it yourself to ensure
your security needs are met.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="newversions"></a>1.3. New Versions</h2></div></div></div><p>
This is the 4.4.11 version of The Bugzilla Guide. It is so named
to match the current version of Bugzilla.
</p><p>
The latest version of this guide can always be found at <a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/docs/" target="_top">http://www.bugzilla.org/docs/</a>. However, you should read
the version which came with the Bugzilla release you are using.
</p><p>
In addition, there are Bugzilla template localization projects in
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/download/#localizations" target="_top">several languages</a>.
They may have translated documentation available. If you would like to
volunteer to translate the Guide into additional languages, please visit the
<a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:L10n" target="_top">Bugzilla L10n team</a>
page.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="credits"></a>1.4. Credits</h2></div></div></div><p>
The people listed below have made enormous contributions to the
creation of this Guide, through their writing, dedicated hacking efforts,
numerous e-mail and IRC support sessions, and overall excellent
contribution to the Bugzilla community:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Matthew P. Barnson <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:mbarnson@sisna.com">mbarnson@sisna.com</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for the Herculean task of pulling together the Bugzilla Guide
and shepherding it to 2.14.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Terry Weissman <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:terry@mozilla.org">terry@mozilla.org</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for initially writing Bugzilla and creating the README upon
which the UNIX installation documentation is largely based.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Tara Hernandez <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:tara@tequilarists.org">tara@tequilarists.org</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for keeping Bugzilla development going strong after Terry left
mozilla.org and for running landfill.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Dave Lawrence <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:dkl@redhat.com">dkl@redhat.com</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for providing insight into the key differences between Red
Hat's customized Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Dawn Endico <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:endico@mozilla.org">endico@mozilla.org</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for being a hacker extraordinaire and putting up with Matthew's
incessant questions and arguments on irc.mozilla.org in #mozwebtools
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Jacob Steenhagen <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:jake@bugzilla.org">jake@bugzilla.org</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for taking over documentation during the 2.17 development
period.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Dave Miller <code class="email"><<a class="email" href="mailto:justdave@bugzilla.org">justdave@bugzilla.org</a>></code></span></dt><dd><p>for taking over as project lead when Tara stepped down and
continually pushing for the documentation to be the best it can be.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
Thanks also go to the following people for significant contributions
to this documentation:
<span class="simplelist">Kevin Brannen, Vlad Dascalu, Ben FrantzDale, Eric Hanson, Zach Lipton, Gervase Markham, Andrew Pearson, Joe Robins, Spencer Smith, Ron Teitelbaum, Shane Travis, Martin Wulffeld</span>.
</p><p>
Also, thanks are due to the members of the
<a class="ulink" href="news://news.mozilla.org/mozilla.support.bugzilla" target="_top">
mozilla.support.bugzilla</a>
newsgroup (and its predecessor, netscape.public.mozilla.webtools).
Without your discussions, insight, suggestions, and patches,
this could never have happened.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="conventions"></a>1.5. Document Conventions</h2></div></div></div><p>This document uses the following conventions:</p><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>This is a caution. Make sure to read this to not be in trouble!</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>This is a hint or tip, especially about some configuration tweaks.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>This is just a note, for your information.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>This is a warning, something you should take care of.</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
A filename or a path to a filename is displayed like this:
<code class="filename">/path/to/filename.ext</code>
</p><p>
A command to type in the shell is displayed like this:
<span class="command"><strong>command --arguments</strong></span>
</p><p>bash$ represents a normal user's prompt under bash shell</p><p>bash# represents a root user's prompt under bash shell</p><p>
A word which is in the glossary will appear like this:
<a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-bugzilla"><em class="glossterm">Bugzilla</em></a>
</p><p>
A sample of code is illustrated like this:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
First Line of Code
Second Line of Code
...
</pre><p>
</p><p>
This documentation is maintained in DocBook 4.2 XML format.
Changes are best submitted as plain text or XML diffs, attached
to a bug filed in the <a class="ulink" href="http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=Bugzilla;component=Documentation" target="_top">Bugzilla Documentation</a>
component.
</p></div></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="installing-bugzilla"></a>Chapter 2. Installing Bugzilla</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation">2.1. Installation</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perl">2.1.1. Perl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-database">2.1.2. Database Engine</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-webserver">2.1.3. Web Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-bzfiles">2.1.4. Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perlmodules">2.1.5. Perl Modules</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-MTA">2.1.6. Mail Transfer Agent (MTA)</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#using-mod_perl-with-bugzilla">2.1.7. Installing Bugzilla on mod_perl</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#configuration">2.2. Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#localconfig">2.2.1. localconfig</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#database-engine">2.2.2. Database Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648076272">2.2.3. checksetup.pl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#http">2.2.4. Web server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-config-bugzilla">2.2.5. Bugzilla</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#extraconfig">2.3. Optional Additional Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354647978320">2.3.1. Bug Graphs</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation-whining-cron">2.3.2. The Whining Cron</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#installation-whining">2.3.3. Whining</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#apache-addtype">2.3.4. Serving Alternate Formats with the right MIME type</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#multiple-bz-dbs">2.4. Multiple Bugzilla databases with a single installation</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-specific">2.5. OS-Specific Installation Notes</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-win32">2.5.1. Microsoft Windows</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-macosx">2.5.2. <span class="productname">Mac OS X</span>™</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#os-linux">2.5.3. Linux/BSD Distributions</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#nonroot">2.6. UNIX (non-root) Installation Notes</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655437216">2.6.1. Introduction</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655434976">2.6.2. MySQL</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655413296">2.6.3. Perl</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#install-perlmodules-nonroot">2.6.4. Perl Modules</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655398464">2.6.5. HTTP Server</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354655391456">2.6.6. Bugzilla</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade">2.7. Upgrading to New Releases</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-before">2.7.1. Before You Upgrade</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-files">2.7.2. Getting The New Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-completion">2.7.3. Completing Your Upgrade</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#upgrade-notifications">2.7.4. Automatic Notifications of New Releases</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="installation"></a>2.1. Installation</h2></div></div></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>If you just want to <span class="emphasis"><em>use</em></span> Bugzilla,
you do not need to install it. None of this chapter is relevant to
you. Ask your Bugzilla administrator for the URL to access it from
your web browser.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>The Bugzilla server software is usually installed on Linux or
Solaris.
If you are installing on another OS, check <a class="xref" href="#os-specific" title="2.5. OS-Specific Installation Notes">Section 2.5, “OS-Specific Installation Notes”</a>
before you start your installation to see if there are any special
instructions.
</p><p>This guide assumes that you have administrative access to the
Bugzilla machine. It not possible to
install and run Bugzilla itself without administrative access except
in the very unlikely event that every single prerequisite is
already installed.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>The installation process may make your machine insecure for
short periods of time. Make sure there is a firewall between you
and the Internet.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
You are strongly recommended to make a backup of your system
before installing Bugzilla (and at regular intervals thereafter :-).
</p><p>In outline, the installation proceeds as follows:
</p><div class="procedure"><ol class="procedure" type="1"><li class="step"><p><a class="link" href="#install-perl" title="2.1.1. Perl">Install Perl</a>
(5.8.1 or above)
</p></li><li class="step"><p><a class="link" href="#install-database" title="2.1.2. Database Engine">Install a Database Engine</a>
</p></li><li class="step"><p><a class="link" href="#install-webserver" title="2.1.3. Web Server">Install a Webserver</a>
</p></li><li class="step"><p><a class="link" href="#install-bzfiles" title="2.1.4. Bugzilla">Install Bugzilla</a>
</p></li><li class="step"><p><a class="link" href="#install-perlmodules" title="2.1.5. Perl Modules">Install Perl modules</a>
</p></li><li class="step"><p>
<a class="link" href="#install-MTA" title="2.1.6. Mail Transfer Agent (MTA)">Install a Mail Transfer Agent</a>
(Sendmail 8.7 or above, or an MTA that is Sendmail-compatible with at least this version)
</p></li><li class="step"><p>Configure all of the above.
</p></li></ol></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-perl"></a>2.1.1. Perl</h3></div></div></div><p>Installed Version Test: </p><pre class="programlisting">perl -v</pre><p>Any machine that doesn't have Perl on it is a sad machine indeed.
If you don't have it and your OS doesn't provide official packages,
visit <a class="ulink" href="http://www.perl.org" target="_top">http://www.perl.org</a>.
Although Bugzilla runs with Perl 5.8.1,
it's a good idea to be using the latest stable version.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-database"></a>2.1.2. Database Engine</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla supports MySQL, PostgreSQL and Oracle as database servers.
You only require one of these systems to make use of Bugzilla.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="install-mysql"></a>2.1.2.1. MySQL</h4></div></div></div><p>Installed Version Test: </p><pre class="programlisting">mysql -V</pre><p>
If you don't have it and your OS doesn't provide official packages,
visit <a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com" target="_top">http://www.mysql.com</a>. You need MySQL version
5.0.15 or higher.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p> Many of the binary
versions of MySQL store their data files in
<code class="filename">/var</code>.
On some Unix systems, this is part of a smaller root partition,
and may not have room for your bug database. To change the data
directory, you have to build MySQL from source yourself, and
set it as an option to <code class="filename">configure</code>.</p></td></tr></table></div><p>If you install from something other than a packaging/installation
system, such as .rpm (RPM Package Manager), .deb (Debian Package), .exe
(Windows Executable), or .msi (Windows Installer), make sure the MySQL
server is started when the machine boots.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="install-pg"></a>2.1.2.2. PostgreSQL</h4></div></div></div><p>Installed Version Test: </p><pre class="programlisting">psql -V</pre><p>
If you don't have it and your OS doesn't provide official packages,
visit <a class="ulink" href="http://www.postgresql.org/" target="_top">http://www.postgresql.org/</a>. You need PostgreSQL
version 8.03.0000 or higher.
</p><p>If you install from something other than a packaging/installation
system, such as .rpm (RPM Package Manager), .deb (Debian Package), .exe
(Windows Executable), or .msi (Windows Installer), make sure the
PostgreSQL server is started when the machine boots.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="install-oracle"></a>2.1.2.3. Oracle</h4></div></div></div><p>
Installed Version Test: </p><pre class="programlisting">select * from v$version</pre><p>
(you first have to log in into your DB)
</p><p>
If you don't have it and your OS doesn't provide official packages,
visit <a class="ulink" href="http://www.oracle.com/" target="_top">http://www.oracle.com/</a>. You need Oracle
version 10.02.0 or higher.
</p><p>
If you install from something other than a packaging/installation
system, such as .rpm (RPM Package Manager), .deb (Debian Package), .exe
(Windows Executable), or .msi (Windows Installer), make sure the
Oracle server is started when the machine boots.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-webserver"></a>2.1.3. Web Server</h3></div></div></div><p>Installed Version Test: view the default welcome page at
http://<your-machine>/</p><p>
You have freedom of choice here, pretty much any web server that
is capable of running <a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-cgi"><em class="glossterm">CGI</em></a>
scripts will work.
However, we strongly recommend using the Apache web server
(either 1.3.x or 2.x), and the installation instructions usually assume
you are using it. If you have got Bugzilla working using another web server,
please share your experiences with us by filing a bug in
<a class="ulink" href="http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=Bugzilla;component=Documentation" target="_top">Bugzilla Documentation</a>.
</p><p>
If you don't have Apache and your OS doesn't provide official packages,
visit <a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/" target="_top">http://httpd.apache.org/</a>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-bzfiles"></a>2.1.4. Bugzilla</h3></div></div></div><p>
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/download/" target="_top">Download a Bugzilla tarball</a>
(or <a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Bzr" target="_top">check it out from Bzr</a>)
and place it in a suitable directory, accessible by the default web server user
(probably <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">apache</span>”</span> or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">www</span>”</span>).
Good locations are either directly in the web server's document directories or
in <code class="filename">/usr/local</code> with a symbolic link to the web server's
document directories or an alias in the web server's configuration.
</p><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>The default Bugzilla distribution is NOT designed to be placed
in a <code class="filename">cgi-bin</code> directory. This
includes any directory which is configured using the
<code class="option">ScriptAlias</code> directive of Apache.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>Once all the files are in a web accessible directory, make that
directory writable by your web server's user. This is a temporary step
until you run the
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>
script, which locks down your installation.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-perlmodules"></a>2.1.5. Perl Modules</h3></div></div></div><p>Bugzilla's installation process is based
on a script called <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>.
The first thing it checks is whether you have appropriate
versions of all the required
Perl modules. The aim of this section is to pass this check.
When it passes, proceed to <a class="xref" href="#configuration" title="2.2. Configuration">Section 2.2, “Configuration”</a>.
</p><p>
At this point, you need to <code class="filename">su</code> to root. You should
remain as root until the end of the install. To check you have the
required modules, run:
</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> ./checksetup.pl --check-modules</pre><p>
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> will print out a list of the
required and optional Perl modules, together with the versions
(if any) installed on your machine.
The list of required modules is reasonably long; however, you
may already have several of them installed.
</p><p>
The preferred way to install missing Perl modules is to use the package
manager provided by your operating system (e.g <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">rpm</span>”</span> or
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">yum</span>”</span> on Linux distros, or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ppm</span>”</span> on Windows
if using ActivePerl, see <a class="xref" href="#win32-perl-modules" title="2.5.1.2. Perl Modules on Win32">Section 2.5.1.2, “Perl Modules on Win32”</a>).
If some Perl modules are still missing or are too old, then we recommend
using the <code class="filename">install-module.pl</code> script (doesn't work
with ActivePerl on Windows). If for some reason you really need to
install the Perl modules manually, see
<a class="xref" href="#install-perlmodules-manual" title="Appendix C. Manual Installation of Perl Modules">Appendix C, <i>Manual Installation of Perl Modules</i></a>. For instance, on Unix,
you invoke <code class="filename">install-module.pl</code> as follows:
</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> perl install-module.pl <modulename></pre><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Many people complain that Perl modules will not install for
them. Most times, the error messages complain that they are missing a
file in
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">@INC</span>”</span>.
Virtually every time, this error is due to permissions being set too
restrictively for you to compile Perl modules or not having the
necessary Perl development libraries installed on your system.
Consult your local UNIX systems administrator for help solving these
permissions issues; if you
<span class="emphasis"><em>are</em></span>
the local UNIX sysadmin, please consult the newsgroup/mailing list
for further assistance or hire someone to help you out.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>If you are using a package-based system, and attempting to install the
Perl modules from CPAN, you may need to install the "development" packages for
MySQL and GD before attempting to install the related Perl modules. The names of
these packages will vary depending on the specific distribution you are using,
but are often called <code class="filename"><packagename>-devel</code>.</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Here is a complete list of modules and their minimum versions.
Some modules have special installation notes, which follow.
</p><p>Required Perl modules:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
CGI (3.51)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Date::Format (2.23)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DateTime (0.28)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DateTime::TimeZone (0.71)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DBI (1.614)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DBD::mysql (4.001) if using MySQL
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DBD::Pg (2.7.0) if using PostgreSQL
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
DBD::Oracle (1.19) if using Oracle
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Digest::SHA (any)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Email::Send (2.04)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Email::MIME (1.904)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Template (2.22)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
URI (1.37)
</p></li></ol></div><p>
Optional Perl modules:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
GD (1.20) for bug charting
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Template::Plugin::GD::Image
(any) for Graphical Reports
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Chart::Lines (2.1.0) for bug charting
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
GD::Graph (any) for bug charting
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
GD::Text (any) for bug charting
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
XML::Twig (any) for bug import/export
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
MIME::Parser (5.406) for bug import/export
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
LWP::UserAgent
(any) for Automatic Update Notifications
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
PatchReader (0.9.6) for pretty HTML view of patches
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Net::LDAP
(any) for LDAP Authentication
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Authen::SASL
(any) for SASL Authentication
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Authen::Radius
(any) for RADIUS Authentication
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
SOAP::Lite (0.712) for the web service interface
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
JSON::RPC
(any) for the JSON-RPC interface
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Test::Taint
(any) for the web service interface
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
HTML::Parser
(3.67) for More HTML in Product/Group Descriptions
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
HTML::Scrubber
(any) for More HTML in Product/Group Descriptions
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Email::Reply
(any) for Inbound Email
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
TheSchwartz
(1.07) for Mail Queueing
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Daemon::Generic
(any) for Mail Queueing
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
mod_perl2
(1.999022) for mod_perl
</p></li></ol></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-MTA"></a>2.1.6. Mail Transfer Agent (MTA)</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla is dependent on the availability of an e-mail system for its
user authentication and for other tasks.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
This is not entirely true. It is possible to completely disable
email sending, or to have Bugzilla store email messages in a
file instead of sending them. However, this is mainly intended
for testing, as disabling or diverting email on a production
machine would mean that users could miss important events (such
as bug changes or the creation of new accounts).
</p><p>
For more information, see the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">mail_delivery_method</span>”</span> parameter
in <a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
On Linux, any Sendmail-compatible MTA (Mail Transfer Agent) will
suffice. Sendmail, Postfix, qmail and Exim are examples of common
MTAs. Sendmail is the original Unix MTA, but the others are easier to
configure, and therefore many people replace Sendmail with Postfix or
Exim. They are drop-in replacements, so Bugzilla will not
distinguish between them.
</p><p>
If you are using Sendmail, version 8.7 or higher is required.
If you are using a Sendmail-compatible MTA, it must be congruent with
at least version 8.7 of Sendmail.
</p><p>
Consult the manual for the specific MTA you choose for detailed
installation instructions. Each of these programs will have their own
configuration files where you must configure certain parameters to
ensure that the mail is delivered properly. They are implemented
as services, and you should ensure that the MTA is in the auto-start
list of services for the machine.
</p><p>
If a simple mail sent with the command-line 'mail' program
succeeds, then Bugzilla should also be fine.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="using-mod_perl-with-bugzilla"></a>2.1.7. Installing Bugzilla on mod_perl</h3></div></div></div><p>It is now possible to run the Bugzilla software under <code class="literal">mod_perl</code> on
Apache. <code class="literal">mod_perl</code> has some additional requirements to that of running
Bugzilla under <code class="literal">mod_cgi</code> (the standard and previous way).</p><p>Bugzilla requires <code class="literal">mod_perl</code> to be installed, which can be
obtained from <a class="ulink" href="http://perl.apache.org" target="_top">http://perl.apache.org</a> - Bugzilla requires
version 1.999022 (AKA 2.0.0-RC5) to be installed.</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="configuration"></a>2.2. Configuration</h2></div></div></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Poorly-configured MySQL and Bugzilla installations have
given attackers full access to systems in the past. Please take the
security parts of these guidelines seriously, even for Bugzilla
machines hidden away behind your firewall. Be certain to read
<a class="xref" href="#security" title="Chapter 4. Bugzilla Security">Chapter 4, <i>Bugzilla Security</i></a> for some important security tips.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="localconfig"></a>2.2.1. localconfig</h3></div></div></div><p>
You should now run <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> again, this time
without the <code class="literal">--check-modules</code> switch.
</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> ./checksetup.pl</pre><p>
This time, <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> should tell you that all
the correct modules are installed and will display a message about, and
write out a file called, <code class="filename">localconfig</code>. This file
contains the default settings for a number of Bugzilla parameters.
</p><p>
Load this file in your editor. The only two values you
<span class="emphasis"><em>need</em></span> to change are $db_driver and $db_pass,
respectively the type of the database and the password for
the user you will create for your database. Pick a strong
password (for simplicity, it should not contain single quote
characters) and put it here. $db_driver can be either 'mysql',
'Pg', 'Oracle' or 'Sqlite'.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
In Oracle, <code class="literal">$db_name</code> should actually be
the SID name of your database (e.g. "XE" if you are using Oracle XE).
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
You may need to change the value of
<span class="emphasis"><em>webservergroup</em></span> if your web server does not
run in the "apache" group. On Debian, for example, Apache runs in
the "www-data" group. If you are going to run Bugzilla on a
machine where you do not have root access (such as on a shared web
hosting account), you will need to leave
<span class="emphasis"><em>webservergroup</em></span> empty, ignoring the warnings
that <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> will subsequently display
every time it is run.
</p><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you are using suexec, you should use your own primary group
for <span class="emphasis"><em>webservergroup</em></span> rather than leaving it
empty, and see the additional directions in the suexec section
<a class="xref" href="#suexec" title="2.6.6.1. suexec or shared hosting">Section 2.6.6.1, “suexec or shared hosting”</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
The other options in the <code class="filename">localconfig</code> file
are documented by their accompanying comments. If you have a slightly
non-standard database setup, you may wish to change one or more of
the other "$db_*" parameters.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="database-engine"></a>2.2.2. Database Server</h3></div></div></div><p>
This section deals with configuring your database server for use
with Bugzilla. Currently, MySQL (<a class="xref" href="#mysql" title="2.2.2.2. MySQL">Section 2.2.2.2, “MySQL”</a>),
PostgreSQL (<a class="xref" href="#postgresql" title="2.2.2.3. PostgreSQL">Section 2.2.2.3, “PostgreSQL”</a>), Oracle (<a class="xref" href="#oracle" title="2.2.2.4. Oracle">Section 2.2.2.4, “Oracle”</a>)
and SQLite (<a class="xref" href="#sqlite" title="2.2.2.5. SQLite">Section 2.2.2.5, “SQLite”</a>) are available.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="database-schema"></a>2.2.2.1. Bugzilla Database Schema</h4></div></div></div><p>
The Bugzilla database schema is available at
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.ravenbrook.com/project/p4dti/tool/cgi/bugzilla-schema/" target="_top">Ravenbrook</a>.
This very valuable tool can generate a written description of
the Bugzilla database schema for any version of Bugzilla. It
can also generate a diff between two versions to help someone
see what has changed.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="mysql"></a>2.2.2.2. MySQL</h4></div></div></div><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
MySQL's default configuration is insecure.
We highly recommend to run <code class="filename">mysql_secure_installation</code>
on Linux or the MySQL installer on Windows, and follow the instructions.
Important points to note are:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Be sure that the root account has a secure password set.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Do not create an anonymous account, and if it exists, say "yes"
to remove it.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If your web server and MySQL server are on the same machine,
you should disable the network access.</p></li></ol></div><p>
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="mysql-max-allowed-packet"></a>2.2.2.2.1. Allow large attachments and many comments</h5></div></div></div><p>By default, MySQL will only allow you to insert things
into the database that are smaller than 1MB. Attachments
may be larger than this. Also, Bugzilla combines all comments
on a single bug into one field for full-text searching, and the
combination of all comments on a single bug could in some cases
be larger than 1MB.</p><p>To change MySQL's default, you need to edit your MySQL
configuration file, which is usually <code class="filename">/etc/my.cnf</code>
on Linux. We recommend that you allow at least 4MB packets by
adding the "max_allowed_packet" parameter to your MySQL
configuration in the "[mysqld]" section, like this:</p><pre class="screen">[mysqld]
# Allow packets up to 4MB
max_allowed_packet=4M
</pre></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648141008"></a>2.2.2.2.2. Allow small words in full-text indexes</h5></div></div></div><p>By default, words must be at least four characters in length
in order to be indexed by MySQL's full-text indexes. This causes
a lot of Bugzilla specific words to be missed, including "cc",
"ftp" and "uri".</p><p>MySQL can be configured to index those words by setting the
ft_min_word_len param to the minimum size of the words to index.
This can be done by modifying the <code class="filename">/etc/my.cnf</code>
according to the example below:</p><pre class="screen">[mysqld]
# Allow small words in full-text indexes
ft_min_word_len=2</pre><p>Rebuilding the indexes can be done based on documentation found at
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Fulltext_Fine-tuning.html" target="_top">http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Fulltext_Fine-tuning.html</a>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="install-setupdatabase-adduser"></a>2.2.2.2.3. Add a user to MySQL</h5></div></div></div><p>
You need to add a new MySQL user for Bugzilla to use.
(It's not safe to have Bugzilla use the MySQL root account.)
The following instructions assume the defaults in
<code class="filename">localconfig</code>; if you changed those,
you need to modify the SQL command appropriately. You will
need the <em class="replaceable"><code>$db_pass</code></em> password you
set in <code class="filename">localconfig</code> in
<a class="xref" href="#localconfig" title="2.2.1. localconfig">Section 2.2.1, “localconfig”</a>.
</p><p>
We use an SQL <span class="command"><strong>GRANT</strong></span> command to create
a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">bugs</span>”</span> user. This also restricts the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">bugs</span>”</span>user to operations within a database
called <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">bugs</span>”</span>, and only allows the account
to connect from <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">localhost</span>”</span>. Modify it to
reflect your setup if you will be connecting from another
machine or as a different user.
</p><p>
Run the <code class="filename">mysql</code> command-line client and enter:
</p><pre class="screen">
<code class="prompt">mysql></code> GRANT SELECT, INSERT,
UPDATE, DELETE, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE, LOCK TABLES,
CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, DROP, REFERENCES ON bugs.*
TO bugs@localhost IDENTIFIED BY '<em class="replaceable"><code>$db_pass</code></em>';
<code class="prompt">mysql></code> FLUSH PRIVILEGES;
</pre></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648124832"></a>2.2.2.2.4. Permit attachments table to grow beyond 4GB</h5></div></div></div><p>
By default, MySQL will limit the size of a table to 4GB.
This limit is present even if the underlying filesystem
has no such limit. To set a higher limit, follow these
instructions.
</p><p>
After you have completed the rest of the installation (or at least the
database setup parts), you should run the <code class="filename">MySQL</code>
command-line client and enter the following, replacing <code class="literal">$bugs_db</code>
with your Bugzilla database name (<span class="emphasis"><em>bugs</em></span> by default):
</p><pre class="screen">
<code class="prompt">mysql></code> use <em class="replaceable"><code>$bugs_db</code></em>
<code class="prompt">mysql></code> ALTER TABLE attachments
AVG_ROW_LENGTH=1000000, MAX_ROWS=20000;
</pre><p>
The above command will change the limit to 20GB. Mysql will have
to make a temporary copy of your entire table to do this. Ideally,
you should do this when your attachments table is still small.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
This does not affect Big Files, attachments that are stored directly
on disk instead of in the database.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="postgresql"></a>2.2.2.3. PostgreSQL</h4></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648115232"></a>2.2.2.3.1. Add a User to PostgreSQL</h5></div></div></div><p>You need to add a new user to PostgreSQL for the Bugzilla
application to use when accessing the database. The following instructions
assume the defaults in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>; if you
changed those, you need to modify the commands appropriately. You will
need the <em class="replaceable"><code>$db_pass</code></em> password you
set in <code class="filename">localconfig</code> in
<a class="xref" href="#localconfig" title="2.2.1. localconfig">Section 2.2.1, “localconfig”</a>.</p><p>On most systems, to create the user in PostgreSQL, you will need to
login as the root user, and then</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> su - postgres</pre><p>As the postgres user, you then need to create a new user: </p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash$</code> createuser -U postgres -dRSP bugs</pre><p>When asked for a password, provide the password which will be set as
<em class="replaceable"><code>$db_pass</code></em> in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>.
The created user will not be a superuser (-S) and will not be able to create
new users (-R). He will only have the ability to create databases (-d).</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648105680"></a>2.2.2.3.2. Configure PostgreSQL</h5></div></div></div><p>Now, you will need to edit <code class="filename">pg_hba.conf</code> which is
usually located in <code class="filename">/var/lib/pgsql/data/</code>. In this file,
you will need to add a new line to it as follows:</p><p>
<code class="computeroutput">host all bugs 127.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 md5</code>
</p><p>This means that for TCP/IP (host) connections, allow connections from
'127.0.0.1' to 'all' databases on this server from the 'bugs' user, and use
password authentication (md5) for that user.</p><p>Now, you will need to restart PostgreSQL, but you will need to fully
stop and start the server rather than just restarting due to the possibility
of a change to <code class="filename">postgresql.conf</code>. After the server has
restarted, you will need to edit <code class="filename">localconfig</code>, finding
the <code class="literal">$db_driver</code> variable and setting it to
<code class="literal">Pg</code> and changing the password in <code class="literal">$db_pass</code>
to the one you picked previously, while setting up the account.</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="oracle"></a>2.2.2.4. Oracle</h4></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648095456"></a>2.2.2.4.1. Create a New Tablespace</h5></div></div></div><p>
You can use the existing tablespace or create a new one for Bugzilla.
To create a new tablespace, run the following command:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
CREATE TABLESPACE bugs
DATAFILE '<em class="replaceable"><code>$path_to_datafile</code></em>' SIZE 500M
AUTOEXTEND ON NEXT 30M MAXSIZE UNLIMITED
</pre><p>
Here, the name of the tablespace is 'bugs', but you can
choose another name. <em class="replaceable"><code>$path_to_datafile</code></em> is
the path to the file containing your database, for instance
<code class="filename">/u01/oradata/bugzilla.dbf</code>.
The initial size of the database file is set in this example to 500 Mb,
with an increment of 30 Mb everytime we reach the size limit of the file.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648090784"></a>2.2.2.4.2. Add a User to Oracle</h5></div></div></div><p>
The user name and password must match what you set in
<code class="filename">localconfig</code> (<code class="literal">$db_user</code>
and <code class="literal">$db_pass</code>, respectively). Here, we assume that
the user name is 'bugs' and the tablespace name is the same
as above.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
CREATE USER bugs
IDENTIFIED BY "<em class="replaceable"><code>$db_pass</code></em>"
DEFAULT TABLESPACE bugs
TEMPORARY TABLESPACE TEMP
PROFILE DEFAULT;
-- GRANT/REVOKE ROLE PRIVILEGES
GRANT CONNECT TO bugs;
GRANT RESOURCE TO bugs;
-- GRANT/REVOKE SYSTEM PRIVILEGES
GRANT UNLIMITED TABLESPACE TO bugs;
GRANT EXECUTE ON CTXSYS.CTX_DDL TO bugs;
</pre></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354648085648"></a>2.2.2.4.3. Configure the Web Server</h5></div></div></div><p>
If you use Apache, append these lines to <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code>
to set ORACLE_HOME and LD_LIBRARY_PATH. For instance:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
SetEnv ORACLE_HOME /u01/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/
SetEnv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /u01/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/lib/
</pre><p>
When this is done, restart your web server.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="sqlite"></a>2.2.2.5. SQLite</h4></div></div></div><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Due to SQLite's <a class="ulink" href="http://sqlite.org/faq.html#q5" target="_top">concurrency
limitations</a> we recommend SQLite only for small and development
Bugzilla installations.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
No special configuration is required to run Bugzilla on SQLite.
The database will be stored in <code class="filename">data/db/$db_name</code>,
where <code class="literal">$db_name</code> is the database name defined
in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354648076272"></a>2.2.3. checksetup.pl</h3></div></div></div><p>
Next, rerun <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>. It reconfirms
that all the modules are present, and notices the altered
localconfig file, which it assumes you have edited to your
satisfaction. It compiles the UI templates,
connects to the database using the 'bugs'
user you created and the password you defined, and creates the
'bugs' database and the tables therein.
</p><p>
After that, it asks for details of an administrator account. Bugzilla
can have multiple administrators - you can create more later - but
it needs one to start off with.
Enter the email address of an administrator, his or her full name,
and a suitable Bugzilla password.
</p><p>
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> will then finish. You may rerun
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> at any time if you wish.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="http"></a>2.2.4. Web server</h3></div></div></div><p>
Configure your web server according to the instructions in the
appropriate section. (If it makes a difference in your choice,
the Bugzilla Team recommends Apache.) To check whether your web server
is correctly configured, try to access <code class="filename">testagent.cgi</code>
from your web server. If "OK" is displayed, then your configuration
is successful. Regardless of which web server
you are using, however, ensure that sensitive information is
not remotely available by properly applying the access controls in
<a class="xref" href="#security-webserver-access" title="4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files">Section 4.2.1, “Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files”</a>. You can run
<code class="filename">testserver.pl</code> to check if your web server serves
Bugzilla files as expected.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="http-apache"></a>2.2.4.1. Bugzilla using Apache</h4></div></div></div><p>You have two options for running Bugzilla under Apache -
<a class="link" href="#http-apache-mod_cgi" title="2.2.4.1.1. Apache httpd™ with mod_cgi">mod_cgi</a> (the default) and
<a class="link" href="#http-apache-mod_perl" title="2.2.4.1.2. Apache httpd™ with mod_perl">mod_perl</a> (new in Bugzilla
2.23)
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="http-apache-mod_cgi"></a>2.2.4.1.1. Apache <span class="productname">httpd</span>™ with mod_cgi</h5></div></div></div><p>
To configure your Apache web server to work with Bugzilla while using
mod_cgi, do the following:
</p><div class="procedure"><ol class="procedure" type="1"><li class="step"><p>
Load <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code> in your editor.
In Fedora and Red Hat Linux, this file is found in
<code class="filename">/etc/httpd/conf</code>.
</p></li><li class="step"><p>
Apache uses <code class="computeroutput"><Directory></code>
directives to permit fine-grained permission setting. Add the
following lines to a directive that applies to the location
of your Bugzilla installation. (If such a section does not
exist, you'll want to add one.) In this example, Bugzilla has
been installed at
<code class="filename">/var/www/html/bugzilla</code>.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<Directory /var/www/html/bugzilla>
AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
Options +ExecCGI
DirectoryIndex index.cgi index.html
AllowOverride All
</Directory>
</pre><p>
These instructions: allow apache to run .cgi files found
within the bugzilla directory; instructs the server to look
for a file called <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> or, if not
found, <code class="filename">index.html</code> if someone
only types the directory name into the browser; and allows
Bugzilla's <code class="filename">.htaccess</code> files to override
some global permissions.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
It is possible to make these changes globally, or to the
directive controlling Bugzilla's parent directory (e.g.
<code class="computeroutput"><Directory /var/www/html/></code>).
Such changes would also apply to the Bugzilla directory...
but they would also apply to many other places where they
may or may not be appropriate. In most cases, including
this one, it is better to be as restrictive as possible
when granting extra access.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
On Windows, you may have to also add the
<code class="computeroutput">ScriptInterpreterSource Registry-Strict</code>
line, see <a class="link" href="#win32-http" title="2.5.1.3. Serving the web pages">Windows specific notes</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="step"><p>
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> can set tighter permissions
on Bugzilla's files and directories if it knows what group the
web server runs as. Find the <code class="computeroutput">Group</code>
line in <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code>, place the value found
there in the <em class="replaceable"><code>$webservergroup</code></em> variable
in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>, then rerun
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>.
</p></li><li class="step"><p>
Optional: If Bugzilla does not actually reside in the webspace
directory, but instead has been symbolically linked there, you
will need to add the following to the
<code class="computeroutput">Options</code> line of the Bugzilla
<code class="computeroutput"><Directory></code> directive
(the same one as in the step above):
</p><pre class="programlisting">+FollowSymLinks</pre><p>
Without this directive, Apache will not follow symbolic links
to places outside its own directory structure, and you will be
unable to run Bugzilla.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="http-apache-mod_perl"></a>2.2.4.1.2. Apache <span class="productname">httpd</span>™ with mod_perl</h5></div></div></div><p>Some configuration is required to make Bugzilla work with Apache
and mod_perl</p><div class="procedure"><ol class="procedure" type="1"><li class="step"><p>
Load <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code> in your editor.
In Fedora and Red Hat Linux, this file is found in
<code class="filename">/etc/httpd/conf</code>.
</p></li><li class="step"><p>Add the following information to your httpd.conf file, substituting
where appropriate with your own local paths.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>This should be used instead of the <Directory> block
shown above. This should also be above any other <code class="literal">mod_perl</code>
directives within the <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code> and must be specified
in the order as below.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>You should also ensure that you have disabled <code class="literal">KeepAlive</code>
support in your Apache install when utilizing Bugzilla under mod_perl</p></td></tr></table></div><pre class="programlisting">
PerlSwitches -w -T
PerlConfigRequire /var/www/html/bugzilla/mod_perl.pl
</pre></li><li class="step"><p>
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> can set tighter permissions
on Bugzilla's files and directories if it knows what group the
web server runs as. Find the <code class="computeroutput">Group</code>
line in <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code>, place the value found
there in the <em class="replaceable"><code>$webservergroup</code></em> variable
in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>, then rerun
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>.
</p></li></ol></div><p>On restarting Apache, Bugzilla should now be running within the
mod_perl environment. Please ensure you have run checksetup.pl to set
permissions before you restart Apache.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Please bear the following points in mind when looking at using
Bugzilla under mod_perl:
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
mod_perl support in Bugzilla can take up a HUGE amount of RAM. You could be
looking at 30MB per httpd child, easily. Basically, you just need a lot of RAM.
The more RAM you can get, the better. mod_perl is basically trading RAM for
speed. At least 2GB total system RAM is recommended for running Bugzilla under
mod_perl.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Under mod_perl, you have to restart Apache if you make any manual change to
any Bugzilla file. You can't just reload--you have to actually
<span class="emphasis"><em>restart</em></span> the server (as in make sure it stops and starts
again). You <span class="emphasis"><em>can</em></span> change localconfig and the params file
manually, if you want, because those are re-read every time you load a page.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
You must run in Apache's Prefork MPM (this is the default). The Worker MPM
may not work--we haven't tested Bugzilla's mod_perl support under threads.
(And, in fact, we're fairly sure it <span class="emphasis"><em>won't</em></span> work.)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Bugzilla generally expects to be the only mod_perl application running on
your entire server. It may or may not work if there are other applications also
running under mod_perl. It does try its best to play nice with other mod_perl
applications, but it still may have conflicts.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
It is recommended that you have one Bugzilla instance running under mod_perl
on your server. Bugzilla has not been tested with more than one instance running.
</p></li></ul></div><p>
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="http-iis"></a>2.2.4.2. Microsoft <span class="productname">Internet Information Services</span>™</h4></div></div></div><p>
If you are running Bugzilla on Windows and choose to use
Microsoft's <span class="productname">Internet Information Services</span>™
or <span class="productname">Personal Web Server</span>™ you will need
to perform a number of other configuration steps as explained below.
You may also want to refer to the following Microsoft Knowledge
Base articles:
<a class="ulink" href="http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;245225" target="_top">245225</a>
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">HOW TO: Configure and Test a PERL Script with IIS 4.0,
5.0, and 5.1</span>”</span> (for <span class="productname">Internet Information
Services</span>™) and
<a class="ulink" href="http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;231998" target="_top">231998</a>
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">HOW TO: FP2000: How to Use Perl with Microsoft Personal Web
Server on Windows 95/98</span>”</span> (for <span class="productname">Personal Web
Server</span>™).
</p><p>
You will need to create a virtual directory for the Bugzilla
install. Put the Bugzilla files in a directory that is named
something <span class="emphasis"><em>other</em></span> than what you want your
end-users accessing. That is, if you want your users to access
your Bugzilla installation through
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">http://<yourdomainname>/Bugzilla</span>”</span>, then do
<span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> put your Bugzilla files in a directory
named <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Bugzilla</span>”</span>. Instead, place them in a different
location, and then use the IIS Administration tool to create a
Virtual Directory named "Bugzilla" that acts as an alias for the
actual location of the files. When creating that virtual directory,
make sure you add the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Execute (such as ISAPI applications or
CGI)</span>”</span> access permission.
</p><p>
You will also need to tell IIS how to handle Bugzilla's
.cgi files. Using the IIS Administration tool again, open up
the properties for the new virtual directory and select the
Configuration option to access the Script Mappings. Create an
entry mapping .cgi to:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<full path to perl.exe >\perl.exe -x<full path to Bugzilla> -wT "%s" %s
</pre><p>
For example:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
c:\perl\bin\perl.exe -xc:\bugzilla -wT "%s" %s
</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The ActiveState install may have already created an entry for
.pl files that is limited to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">GET,HEAD,POST</span>”</span>. If
so, this mapping should be <span class="emphasis"><em>removed</em></span> as
Bugzilla's .pl files are not designed to be run via a web server.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
IIS will also need to know that the index.cgi should be treated
as a default document. On the Documents tab page of the virtual
directory properties, you need to add index.cgi as a default
document type. If you wish, you may remove the other default
document types for this particular virtual directory, since Bugzilla
doesn't use any of them.
</p><p>
Also, and this can't be stressed enough, make sure that files
such as <code class="filename">localconfig</code> and your
<code class="filename">data</code> directory are
secured as described in <a class="xref" href="#security-webserver-access" title="4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files">Section 4.2.1, “Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files”</a>.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-config-bugzilla"></a>2.2.5. Bugzilla</h3></div></div></div><p>
Your Bugzilla should now be working. Access
<code class="filename">http://<your-bugzilla-server>/</code> -
you should see the Bugzilla
front page. If not, consult the Troubleshooting section,
<a class="xref" href="#troubleshooting" title="Appendix A. Troubleshooting">Appendix A, <i>Troubleshooting</i></a>.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The URL above may be incorrect if you installed Bugzilla into a
subdirectory or used a symbolic link from your web site root to
the Bugzilla directory.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Log in with the administrator account you defined in the last
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> run. You should go through
the Parameters page and see if there are any you wish to change.
They key parameters are documented in <a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>;
you should certainly alter
<span class="command"><strong>maintainer</strong></span> and <span class="command"><strong>urlbase</strong></span>;
you may also want to alter
<span class="command"><strong>cookiepath</strong></span> or <span class="command"><strong>requirelogin</strong></span>.
</p><p>
Bugzilla has several optional features which require extra
configuration. You can read about those in
<a class="xref" href="#extraconfig" title="2.3. Optional Additional Configuration">Section 2.3, “Optional Additional Configuration”</a>.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="extraconfig"></a>2.3. Optional Additional Configuration</h2></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla has a number of optional features. This section describes how
to configure or enable them.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354647978320"></a>2.3.1. Bug Graphs</h3></div></div></div><p>If you have installed the necessary Perl modules you
can start collecting statistics for the nifty Bugzilla
graphs.</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> <span class="command"><strong>crontab -e</strong></span></pre><p>
This should bring up the crontab file in your editor.
Add a cron entry like this to run
<code class="filename">collectstats.pl</code>
daily at 5 after midnight:
</p><pre class="programlisting">5 0 * * * cd <your-bugzilla-directory> && ./collectstats.pl</pre><p>
After two days have passed you'll be able to view bug graphs from
the Reports page.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Windows does not have 'cron', but it does have the Task
Scheduler, which performs the same duties. There are also
third-party tools that can be used to implement cron, such as
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.nncron.ru/" target="_top">nncron</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="installation-whining-cron"></a>2.3.2. The Whining Cron</h3></div></div></div><p>What good are
bugs if they're not annoying? To help make them more so you
can set up Bugzilla's automatic whining system to complain at engineers
which leave their bugs in the CONFIRMED state without triaging them.
</p><p>
This can be done by adding the following command as a daily
crontab entry, in the same manner as explained above for bug
graphs. This example runs it at 12.55am.
</p><pre class="programlisting">55 0 * * * cd <your-bugzilla-directory> && ./whineatnews.pl</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Windows does not have 'cron', but it does have the Task
Scheduler, which performs the same duties. There are also
third-party tools that can be used to implement cron, such as
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.nncron.ru/" target="_top">nncron</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="installation-whining"></a>2.3.3. Whining</h3></div></div></div><p>
As of Bugzilla 2.20, users can configure Bugzilla to regularly annoy
them at regular intervals, by having Bugzilla execute saved searches
at certain times and emailing the results to the user. This is known
as "Whining". The process of configuring Whining is described
in <a class="xref" href="#whining" title="5.13. Whining">Section 5.13, “Whining”</a>, but for it to work a Perl script must be
executed at regular intervals.
</p><p>
This can be done by adding the following command as a daily
crontab entry, in the same manner as explained above for bug
graphs. This example runs it every 15 minutes.
</p><pre class="programlisting">*/15 * * * * cd <your-bugzilla-directory> && ./whine.pl</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Whines can be executed as often as every 15 minutes, so if you specify
longer intervals between executions of whine.pl, some users may not
be whined at as often as they would expect. Depending on the person,
this can either be a very Good Thing or a very Bad Thing.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Windows does not have 'cron', but it does have the Task
Scheduler, which performs the same duties. There are also
third-party tools that can be used to implement cron, such as
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.nncron.ru/" target="_top">nncron</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="apache-addtype"></a>2.3.4. Serving Alternate Formats with the right MIME type</h3></div></div></div><p>
Some Bugzilla pages have alternate formats, other than just plain
<acronym class="acronym">HTML</acronym>. In particular, a few Bugzilla pages can
output their contents as either <acronym class="acronym">XUL</acronym> (a special
Mozilla format, that looks like a program <acronym class="acronym">GUI</acronym>)
or <acronym class="acronym">RDF</acronym> (a type of structured <acronym class="acronym">XML</acronym>
that can be read by various programs).
</p><p>
In order for your users to see these pages correctly, Apache must
send them with the right <acronym class="acronym">MIME</acronym> type. To do this,
add the following lines to your Apache configuration, either in the
<code class="computeroutput"><VirtualHost></code> section for your
Bugzilla, or in the <code class="computeroutput"><Directory></code>
section for your Bugzilla:
</p><p>
</p><pre class="screen">AddType application/vnd.mozilla.xul+xml .xul
AddType application/rdf+xml .rdf</pre><p>
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="multiple-bz-dbs"></a>2.4. Multiple Bugzilla databases with a single installation</h2></div></div></div><p>The previous instructions referred to a standard installation, with
one unique Bugzilla database. However, you may want to host several
distinct installations, without having several copies of the code. This is
possible by using the PROJECT environment variable. When accessed,
Bugzilla checks for the existence of this variable, and if present, uses
its value to check for an alternative configuration file named
<code class="filename">localconfig.<PROJECT></code> in the same location as
the default one (<code class="filename">localconfig</code>). It also checks for
customized templates in a directory named
<code class="filename"><PROJECT></code> in the same location as the
default one (<code class="filename">template/<langcode></code>). By default
this is <code class="filename">template/en/default</code> so PROJECT's templates
would be located at <code class="filename">template/en/PROJECT</code>.</p><p>To set up an alternate installation, just export PROJECT=foo before
running <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span> for the first time. It will
result in a file called <code class="filename">localconfig.foo</code> instead of
<code class="filename">localconfig</code>. Edit this file as described above, with
reference to a new database, and re-run <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span>
to populate it. That's all.</p><p>Now you have to configure the web server to pass this environment
variable when accessed via an alternate URL, such as virtual host for
instance. The following is an example of how you could do it in Apache,
other Webservers may differ.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<VirtualHost 212.85.153.228:80>
ServerName foo.bar.baz
SetEnv PROJECT foo
Alias /bugzilla /var/www/bugzilla
</VirtualHost>
</pre><p>
</p><p>Don't forget to also export this variable before accessing Bugzilla
by other means, such as cron tasks for instance.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="os-specific"></a>2.5. OS-Specific Installation Notes</h2></div></div></div><p>Many aspects of the Bugzilla installation can be affected by the
operating system you choose to install it on. Sometimes it can be made
easier and others more difficult. This section will attempt to help you
understand both the difficulties of running on specific operating systems
and the utilities available to make it easier.
</p><p>If you have anything to add or notes for an operating system not covered,
please file a bug in <a class="ulink" href="http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=Bugzilla;component=Documentation" target="_top">Bugzilla Documentation</a>.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="os-win32"></a>2.5.1. Microsoft Windows</h3></div></div></div><p>
Making Bugzilla work on Windows is more difficult than making it
work on Unix. For that reason, we still recommend doing so on a Unix
based system such as GNU/Linux. That said, if you do want to get
Bugzilla running on Windows, you will need to make the following
adjustments. A detailed step-by-step
<a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Win32Install" target="_top">
installation guide for Windows</a> is also available
if you need more help with your installation.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="win32-perl"></a>2.5.1.1. Win32 Perl</h4></div></div></div><p>
Perl for Windows can be obtained from
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.activestate.com/" target="_top">ActiveState</a>.
You should be able to find a compiled binary at <a class="ulink" href="http://aspn.activestate.com/ASPN/Downloads/ActivePerl/" target="_top">http://aspn.activestate.com/ASPN/Downloads/ActivePerl/</a>.
The following instructions assume that you are using version
5.8.1 of ActiveState.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
These instructions are for 32-bit versions of Windows. If you are
using a 64-bit version of Windows, you will need to install 32-bit
Perl in order to install the 32-bit modules as described below.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="win32-perl-modules"></a>2.5.1.2. Perl Modules on Win32</h4></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla on Windows requires the same perl modules found in
<a class="xref" href="#install-perlmodules" title="2.1.5. Perl Modules">Section 2.1.5, “Perl Modules”</a>. The main difference is that
windows uses <a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-ppm"><em class="glossterm">PPM</em></a> instead
of CPAN. ActiveState provides a GUI to manage Perl modules. We highly
recommend that you use it. If you prefer to use ppm from the
command-line, type:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
C:\perl> <span class="command"><strong>ppm install <module name></strong></span>
</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The PPM repository stores modules in 'packages' that may have
a slightly different name than the module. If retrieving these
modules from there, you will need to pay attention to the information
provided when you run <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span> as it will
tell you what package you'll need to install.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you are behind a corporate firewall, you will need to let the
ActiveState PPM utility know how to get through it to access
the repositories by setting the HTTP_proxy system environmental
variable. For more information on setting that variable, see
the ActiveState documentation.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="win32-http"></a>2.5.1.3. Serving the web pages</h4></div></div></div><p>
As is the case on Unix based systems, any web server should
be able to handle Bugzilla; however, the Bugzilla Team still
recommends Apache whenever asked. No matter what web server
you choose, be sure to pay attention to the security notes
in <a class="xref" href="#security-webserver-access" title="4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files">Section 4.2.1, “Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files”</a>. More
information on configuring specific web servers can be found
in <a class="xref" href="#http" title="2.2.4. Web server">Section 2.2.4, “Web server”</a>.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The web server looks at <code class="filename">/usr/bin/perl</code> to
call Perl. If you are using Apache on windows, you can set the
<a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/core.html#scriptinterpretersource" target="_top">ScriptInterpreterSource</a>
directive in your Apache config file to make it look at the
right place: insert the line
</p><pre class="programlisting">ScriptInterpreterSource Registry-Strict</pre><p>
into your <code class="filename">httpd.conf</code> file, and create the key
</p><pre class="programlisting">HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\.cgi\Shell\ExecCGI\Command</pre><p>
with <code class="option">C:\Perl\bin\perl.exe -T</code> as value (adapt to your
path if needed) in the registry. When this is done, restart Apache.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="win32-email"></a>2.5.1.4. Sending Email</h4></div></div></div><p>
To enable Bugzilla to send email on Windows, the server running the
Bugzilla code must be able to connect to, or act as, an SMTP server.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="os-macosx"></a>2.5.2. <span class="productname">Mac OS X</span>™</h3></div></div></div><p>Making Bugzilla work on Mac OS X requires the following
adjustments.</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="macosx-sendmail"></a>2.5.2.1. Sendmail</h4></div></div></div><p>In Mac OS X 10.3 and later,
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.postfix.org/" target="_top">Postfix</a>
is used as the built-in email server. Postfix provides an executable
that mimics sendmail enough to fool Bugzilla, as long as Bugzilla can
find it. Bugzilla is able to find the fake sendmail executable without
any assistance.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="macosx-libraries"></a>2.5.2.2. Libraries & Perl Modules on Mac OS X</h4></div></div></div><p>Apple does not include the GD library with Mac OS X. Bugzilla
needs this for bug graphs.</p><p>You can use MacPorts (<a class="ulink" href="http://www.macports.org/" target="_top">http://www.macports.org/</a>)
or Fink (<a class="ulink" href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/fink/" target="_top">http://sourceforge.net/projects/fink/</a>), both
of which are similar in nature to the CPAN installer, but install
common unix programs.</p><p>Follow the instructions for setting up MacPorts or Fink.
Once you have one installed, you'll want to use it to install the
<code class="filename">gd2</code> package.
</p><p>Fink will prompt you for a number of dependencies, type 'y' and hit
enter to install all of the dependencies and then watch it work. You will
then be able to use <a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-cpan"><em class="glossterm">CPAN</em></a> to
install the GD Perl module.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>To prevent creating conflicts with the software that Apple
installs by default, Fink creates its own directory tree at
<code class="filename">/sw</code> where it installs most of
the software that it installs. This means your libraries and headers
will be at <code class="filename">/sw/lib</code> and
<code class="filename">/sw/include</code> instead of
<code class="filename">/usr/lib</code> and
<code class="filename">/usr/include</code>. When the
Perl module config script asks where your <code class="filename">libgd</code>
is, be sure to tell it
<code class="filename">/sw/lib</code>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>Also available via MacPorts and Fink is
<code class="filename">expat</code>. After installing the expat package, you
will be able to install XML::Parser using CPAN. If you use fink, there
is one caveat. Unlike recent versions of
the GD module, XML::Parser doesn't prompt for the location of the
required libraries. When using CPAN, you will need to use the following
command sequence:
</p><pre class="screen">
# perl -MCPAN -e'look XML::Parser'
# perl Makefile.PL EXPATLIBPATH=/sw/lib EXPATINCPATH=/sw/include
# make; make test; make install
# exit
</pre><p>
The <span class="command"><strong>look</strong></span> command will download the module and spawn
a new shell with the extracted files as the current working directory.
</p><p>
You should watch the output from these <span class="command"><strong>make</strong></span> commands,
especially <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">make test</span>”</span> as errors may prevent
XML::Parser from functioning correctly with Bugzilla.
</p><p>
The <span class="command"><strong>exit</strong></span> command will return you to your original shell.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="os-linux"></a>2.5.3. Linux/BSD Distributions</h3></div></div></div><p>Many Linux/BSD distributions include Bugzilla and its
dependencies in their native package management systems.
Installing Bugzilla with root access on any Linux/BSD system
should be as simple as finding the Bugzilla package in the
package management application and installing it using the
normal command syntax. Several distributions also perform
the proper web server configuration automatically on installation.
</p><p>Please consult the documentation of your Linux/BSD
distribution for instructions on how to install packages,
or for specific instructions on installing Bugzilla with
native package management tools. There is also a
<a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Prerequisites" target="_top">
Bugzilla Wiki Page</a> for distro-specific installation
notes.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="nonroot"></a>2.6. UNIX (non-root) Installation Notes</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354655437216"></a>2.6.1. Introduction</h3></div></div></div><p>If you are running a *NIX OS as non-root, either due
to lack of access (web hosts, for example) or for security
reasons, this will detail how to install Bugzilla on such
a setup. It is recommended that you read through the
<a class="xref" href="#installation" title="2.1. Installation">Section 2.1, “Installation”</a>
first to get an idea on the installation steps required.
(These notes will reference to steps in that guide.)</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354655434976"></a>2.6.2. MySQL</h3></div></div></div><p>You may have MySQL installed as root. If you're
setting up an account with a web host, a MySQL account
needs to be set up for you. From there, you can create
the bugs account, or use the account given to you.</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>You may have problems trying to set up
<span class="command"><strong>GRANT</strong></span> permissions to the database.
If you're using a web host, chances are that you have a
separate database which is already locked down (or one big
database with limited/no access to the other areas), but you
may want to ask your system administrator what the security
settings are set to, and/or run the <span class="command"><strong>GRANT</strong></span>
command for you.</p><p>Also, you will probably not be able to change the MySQL
root user password (for obvious reasons), so skip that
step.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="idm140354655430384"></a>2.6.2.1. Running MySQL as Non-Root</h4></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354655429632"></a>2.6.2.1.1. The Custom Configuration Method</h5></div></div></div><p>Create a file .my.cnf in your
home directory (using /home/foo in this example)
as follows....</p><pre class="programlisting">
[mysqld]
datadir=/home/foo/mymysql
socket=/home/foo/mymysql/thesock
port=8081
[mysql]
socket=/home/foo/mymysql/thesock
port=8081
[mysql.server]
user=mysql
basedir=/var/lib
[safe_mysqld]
err-log=/home/foo/mymysql/the.log
pid-file=/home/foo/mymysql/the.pid
</pre></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354655427184"></a>2.6.2.1.2. The Custom Built Method</h5></div></div></div><p>You can install MySQL as a not-root, if you really need to.
Build it with PREFIX set to <code class="filename">/home/foo/mysql</code>,
or use pre-installed executables, specifying that you want
to put all of the data files in <code class="filename">/home/foo/mysql/data</code>.
If there is another MySQL server running on the system that you
do not own, use the -P option to specify a TCP port that is not
in use.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="idm140354655423520"></a>2.6.2.1.3. Starting the Server</h5></div></div></div><p>After your mysqld program is built and any .my.cnf file is
in place, you must initialize the databases (ONCE).</p><pre class="screen">
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>mysql_install_db</strong></span>
</pre><p>Then start the daemon with</p><pre class="screen">
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>safe_mysql &</strong></span>
</pre><p>After you start mysqld the first time, you then connect to
it as "root" and <span class="command"><strong>GRANT</strong></span> permissions to other
users. (Again, the MySQL root account has nothing to do with
the *NIX root account.)</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>You will need to start the daemons yourself. You can either
ask your system administrator to add them to system startup files, or
add a crontab entry that runs a script to check on these daemons
and restart them if needed.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Do NOT run daemons or other services on a server without first
consulting your system administrator! Daemons use up system resources
and running one may be in violation of your terms of service for any
machine on which you are a user!</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354655413296"></a>2.6.3. Perl</h3></div></div></div><p>
On the extremely rare chance that you don't have Perl on
the machine, you will have to build the sources
yourself. The following commands should get your system
installed with your own personal version of Perl:
</p><pre class="screen">
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>wget http://perl.org/CPAN/src/stable.tar.gz</strong></span>
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>tar zvxf stable.tar.gz</strong></span>
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>cd perl-5.8.1</strong></span>
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>sh Configure -de -Dprefix=/home/foo/perl</strong></span>
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> <span class="command"><strong>make && make test && make install</strong></span>
</pre><p>
Once you have Perl installed into a directory (probably
in <code class="filename">~/perl/bin</code>), you will need to
install the Perl Modules, described below.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="install-perlmodules-nonroot"></a>2.6.4. Perl Modules</h3></div></div></div><p>
Installing the Perl modules as a non-root user is accomplished by
running the <code class="filename">install-module.pl</code>
script. For more details on this script, see
<a class="ulink" href="../html/api/install-module.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">install-module.pl</code>
documentation</a>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354655398464"></a>2.6.5. HTTP Server</h3></div></div></div><p>Ideally, this also needs to be installed as root and
run under a special web server account. As long as
the web server will allow the running of *.cgi files outside of a
cgi-bin, and a way of denying web access to certain files (such as a
.htaccess file), you should be good in this department.</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="idm140354655396976"></a>2.6.5.1. Running Apache as Non-Root</h4></div></div></div><p>You can run Apache as a non-root user, but the port will need
to be set to one above 1024. If you type <span class="command"><strong>httpd -V</strong></span>,
you will get a list of the variables that your system copy of httpd
uses. One of those, namely HTTPD_ROOT, tells you where that
installation looks for its config information.</p><p>From there, you can copy the config files to your own home
directory to start editing. When you edit those and then use the -d
option to override the HTTPD_ROOT compiled into the web server, you
get control of your own customized web server.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>You will need to start the daemons yourself. You can either
ask your system administrator to add them to system startup files, or
add a crontab entry that runs a script to check on these daemons
and restart them if needed.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Do NOT run daemons or other services on a server without first
consulting your system administrator! Daemons use up system resources
and running one may be in violation of your terms of service for any
machine on which you are a user!</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354655391456"></a>2.6.6. Bugzilla</h3></div></div></div><p>
When you run <span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span> to create
the <code class="filename">localconfig</code> file, it will list the Perl
modules it finds. If one is missing, go back and double-check the
module installation from <a class="xref" href="#install-perlmodules-nonroot" title="2.6.4. Perl Modules">Section 2.6.4, “Perl Modules”</a>,
then delete the <code class="filename">localconfig</code> file and try again.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>One option in <code class="filename">localconfig</code> you
might have problems with is the web server group. If you can't
successfully browse to the <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> (like
a Forbidden error), you may have to relax your permissions,
and blank out the web server group. Of course, this may pose
as a security risk. Having a properly jailed shell and/or
limited access to shell accounts may lessen the security risk,
but use at your own risk.</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="suexec"></a>2.6.6.1. suexec or shared hosting</h4></div></div></div><p>If you are running on a system that uses suexec (most shared
hosting environments do this), you will need to set the
<span class="emphasis"><em>webservergroup</em></span> value in <code class="filename">localconfig</code>
to match <span class="emphasis"><em>your</em></span> primary group, rather than the one
the web server runs under. You will need to run the following
shell commands after running <span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span>,
every time you run it (or modify <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>
to do them for you via the system() command).
</p><pre class="programlisting">
for i in docs graphs images js skins; do find $i -type d -exec chmod o+rx {} \; ; done
for i in jpg gif css js png html rdf xul; do find . -name \*.$i -exec chmod o+r {} \; ; done
find . -name .htaccess -exec chmod o+r {} \;
chmod o+x . data data/webdot
</pre><p>
Pay particular attention to the number of semicolons and dots.
They are all important. A future version of Bugzilla will
hopefully be able to do this for you out of the box.</p></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="upgrade"></a>2.7. Upgrading to New Releases</h2></div></div></div><p>Upgrading to new Bugzilla releases is very simple. There is
a script named <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> included with
Bugzilla that will automatically do all of the database migration
for you.</p><p>The following sections explain how to upgrade from one
version of Bugzilla to another. Whether you are upgrading
from one bug-fix version to another (such as 4.2 to 4.2.1)
or from one major version to another (such as from 4.0 to 4.2),
the instructions are always the same.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Any examples in the following sections are written as though the
user were updating to version 4.2.1, but the procedures are the
same no matter what version you're updating to. Also, in the
examples, the user's Bugzilla installation is found at
<code class="filename">/var/www/html/bugzilla</code>. If that is not the
same as the location of your Bugzilla installation, simply
substitute the proper paths where appropriate.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="upgrade-before"></a>2.7.1. Before You Upgrade</h3></div></div></div><p>Before you start your upgrade, there are a few important
steps to take:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
Read the <a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/releases/" target="_top">Release
Notes</a> of the version you're upgrading to,
particularly the "Notes for Upgraders" section.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
View the Sanity Check (<a class="xref" href="#sanitycheck" title="3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity">Section 3.16, “Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity”</a>) page
on your installation before upgrading. Attempt to fix all warnings
that the page produces before you go any further, or you may
experience problems during your upgrade.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Shut down your Bugzilla installation by putting some HTML or
text in the shutdownhtml parameter
(see <a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Make a backup of the Bugzilla database.
<span class="emphasis"><em>THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT</em></span>. If
anything goes wrong during the upgrade, your installation
can be corrupted beyond recovery. Having a backup keeps you safe.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Upgrading is a one-way process. You cannot "downgrade" an
upgraded Bugzilla. If you wish to revert to the old Bugzilla
version for any reason, you will have to restore your database
from this backup.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>Here are some sample commands you could use to backup
your database, depending on what database system you're
using. You may have to modify these commands for your
particular setup.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">MySQL:</span></dt><dd><p>
<span class="command"><strong>mysqldump --opt -u bugs -p bugs > bugs.sql</strong></span>
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">PostgreSQL:</span></dt><dd><p>
<span class="command"><strong>pg_dump --no-privileges --no-owner -h localhost -U bugs
> bugs.sql</strong></span>
</p></dd></dl></div></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="upgrade-files"></a>2.7.2. Getting The New Bugzilla</h3></div></div></div><p>There are three ways to get the new version of Bugzilla.
We'll list them here briefly and then explain them
more later.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Bzr (<a class="xref" href="#upgrade-bzr" title="2.7.2.2. Upgrading using Bzr">Section 2.7.2.2, “Upgrading using Bzr”</a>)</span></dt><dd><p>
If you have <span class="command"><strong>bzr</strong></span> installed on your machine
and you have Internet access, this is the easiest way to
upgrade, particularly if you have made modifications
to the code or templates of Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Download the tarball (<a class="xref" href="#upgrade-tarball" title="2.7.2.3. Upgrading using the tarball">Section 2.7.2.3, “Upgrading using the tarball”</a>)</span></dt><dd><p>
This is a very simple way to upgrade, and good if you
haven't made many (or any) modifications to the code or
templates of your Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Patches (<a class="xref" href="#upgrade-patches" title="2.7.2.4. Upgrading using patches">Section 2.7.2.4, “Upgrading using patches”</a>)</span></dt><dd><p>
If you have made modifications to your Bugzilla, and
you don't have Internet access or you don't want to use
bzr, then this is the best way to upgrade.
</p><p>
You can only do minor upgrades (such as 4.2 to 4.2.1 or
4.2.1 to 4.2.2) with patches.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="upgrade-modified"></a>2.7.2.1. If you have modified your Bugzilla</h4></div></div></div><p>
If you have modified the code or templates of your Bugzilla,
then upgrading requires a bit more thought and effort.
A discussion of the various methods of updating compared with
degree and methods of local customization can be found in
<a class="xref" href="#template-method" title="6.3.2. Choosing a Customization Method">Section 6.3.2, “Choosing a Customization Method”</a>.
</p><p>
The larger the jump you are trying to make, the more difficult it
is going to be to upgrade if you have made local customizations.
Upgrading from 4.2 to 4.2.1 should be fairly painless even if
you are heavily customized, but going from 2.18 to 4.2 is going
to mean a fair bit of work re-writing your local changes to use
the new files, logic, templates, etc. If you have done no local
changes at all, however, then upgrading should be approximately
the same amount of work regardless of how long it has been since
your version was released.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="upgrade-bzr"></a>2.7.2.2. Upgrading using Bzr</h4></div></div></div><p>
This requires that you have bzr installed (most Unix machines do),
and requires that you are able to access
<a class="ulink" href="http://bzr.mozilla.org/bugzilla/" target="_top">bzr.mozilla.org</a>,
which may not be an option if you don't have Internet access.
</p><p>
The following shows the sequence of commands needed to update a
Bugzilla installation via Bzr, and a typical series of results.
These commands assume that you already have Bugzilla installed
using Bzr.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If your installation is still using CVS, you must first convert
it to Bzr. A very detailed step by step documentation can be
found on <a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Moving_From_CVS_To_Bazaar" target="_top">wiki.mozilla.org</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><pre class="programlisting">
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd /var/www/html/bugzilla</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>bzr switch 4.2</strong></span> (only run this command when not yet running 4.2)
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>bzr up -r tag:bugzilla-4.2.1</strong></span>
+N extensions/MoreBugUrl/
+N extensions/MoreBugUrl/Config.pm
+N extensions/MoreBugUrl/Extension.pm
...
M Bugzilla/Attachment.pm
M Bugzilla/Attachment/PatchReader.pm
M Bugzilla/Bug.pm
...
All changes applied successfully.
</pre><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If a line in the output from <span class="command"><strong>bzr up</strong></span> mentions
a conflict, then that represents a file with local changes that
Bzr was unable to properly merge. You need to resolve these
conflicts manually before Bugzilla (or at least the portion using
that file) will be usable.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="upgrade-tarball"></a>2.7.2.3. Upgrading using the tarball</h4></div></div></div><p>
If you are unable (or unwilling) to use Bzr, another option that's
always available is to obtain the latest tarball from the <a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/download/" target="_top">Download Page</a> and
create a new Bugzilla installation from that.
</p><p>
This sequence of commands shows how to get the tarball from the
command-line; it is also possible to download it from the site
directly in a web browser. If you go that route, save the file
to the <code class="filename">/var/www/html</code>
directory (or its equivalent, if you use something else) and
omit the first three lines of the example.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd /var/www/html</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>wget http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/webtools/bugzilla-4.2.1.tar.gz</strong></span>
<span class="emphasis"><em>(Output omitted)</em></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>tar xzvf bugzilla-4.2.1.tar.gz</strong></span>
bugzilla-4.2.1/
bugzilla-4.2.1/colchange.cgi
<span class="emphasis"><em>(Output truncated)</em></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd bugzilla-4.2.1</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cp ../bugzilla/localconfig* .</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cp -r ../bugzilla/data .</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd ..</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>mv bugzilla bugzilla.old</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>mv bugzilla-4.2.1 bugzilla</strong></span>
</pre><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The <span class="command"><strong>cp</strong></span> commands both end with periods which
is a very important detail--it means that the destination
directory is the current working directory.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you have some extensions installed, you will have to copy them
to the new bugzilla directory too. Extensions are located in
<code class="filename">bugzilla/extensions/</code>. Only copy those you
installed, not those managed by the Bugzilla team.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
This upgrade method will give you a clean install of Bugzilla.
That's fine if you don't have any local customizations that you
want to maintain. If you do have customizations, then you will
need to reapply them by hand to the appropriate files.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="upgrade-patches"></a>2.7.2.4. Upgrading using patches</h4></div></div></div><p>
A patch is a collection of all the bug fixes that have been made
since the last bug-fix release.
</p><p>
If you are doing a bug-fix upgrade—that is, one where only the
last number of the revision changes, such as from 4.2 to
4.2.1—then you have the option of obtaining and applying a
patch file from the <a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/download/" target="_top">Download Page</a>.
</p><p>
As above, this example starts with obtaining the file via the
command line. If you have already downloaded it, you can omit the
first two commands.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd /var/www/html/bugzilla</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>wget http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/webtools/bugzilla-4.2-to-4.2.1.diff.gz</strong></span>
<span class="emphasis"><em>(Output omitted)</em></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>gunzip bugzilla-4.2-to-4.2.1.diff.gz</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>patch -p1 < bugzilla-4.2-to-4.2.1.diff</strong></span>
patching file Bugzilla/Constants.pm
patching file enter_bug.cgi
<span class="emphasis"><em>(etc.)</em></span>
</pre><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Be aware that upgrading from a patch file does not change the
entries in your <code class="filename">.bzr</code> directory.
This could make it more difficult to upgrade using Bzr
(<a class="xref" href="#upgrade-bzr" title="2.7.2.2. Upgrading using Bzr">Section 2.7.2.2, “Upgrading using Bzr”</a>) in the future.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="upgrade-completion"></a>2.7.3. Completing Your Upgrade</h3></div></div></div><p>
Now that you have the new Bugzilla code, there are a few final
steps to complete your upgrade.
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
If your new Bugzilla installation is in a different
directory or on a different machine than your old Bugzilla
installation, make sure that you have copied the
<code class="filename">data</code> directory and the
<code class="filename">localconfig</code> file from your old Bugzilla
installation. (If you followed the tarball instructions
above, this has already happened.)
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
If this is a major update, check that the configuration
(<a class="xref" href="#configuration" title="2.2. Configuration">Section 2.2, “Configuration”</a>) for your new Bugzilla is
up-to-date. Sometimes the configuration requirements change
between major versions.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
If you didn't do it as part of the above configuration step,
now you need to run <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span>, which
will do everything required to convert your existing database
and settings for the new version:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>cd /var/www/html/bugzilla</strong></span>
bash$ <span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span>
</pre><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The period at the beginning of the command
<span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span> is important and cannot
be omitted.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If this is a major upgrade (say, 3.6 to 4.2 or similar),
running <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span> on a large
installation (75,000 or more bugs) can take a long time,
possibly several hours.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Clear any HTML or text that you put into the shutdownhtml
parameter, to re-activate Bugzilla.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
View the Sanity Check (<a class="xref" href="#sanitycheck" title="3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity">Section 3.16, “Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity”</a>) page in your
upgraded Bugzilla.
</p><p>
It is recommended that, if possible, you fix any problems
you see, immediately. Failure to do this may mean that Bugzilla
will not work correctly. Be aware that if the sanity check page
contains more errors after an upgrade, it doesn't necessarily
mean there are more errors in your database than there were
before, as additional tests are added to the sanity check over
time, and it is possible that those errors weren't being
checked for in the old version.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="upgrade-notifications"></a>2.7.4. Automatic Notifications of New Releases</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla 3.0 introduced the ability to automatically notify
administrators when new releases are available, based on the
<code class="literal">upgrade_notification</code> parameter, see
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>. Administrators will see these
notifications when they access the <code class="filename">index.cgi</code>
page, i.e. generally when logging in. Bugzilla will check once per
day for new releases, unless the parameter is set to
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">disabled</span>”</span>. If you are behind a proxy, you may have to set
the <code class="literal">proxy_url</code> parameter accordingly. If the proxy
requires authentication, use the
<code class="literal">http://user:pass@proxy_url/</code> syntax.
</p></div></div></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="administration"></a>Chapter 3. Administering Bugzilla</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#parameters">3.1. Bugzilla Configuration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-requiredsettings">3.1.1. Required Settings</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-admin-policies">3.1.2. Administrative Policies</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-user-authentication">3.1.3. User Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-attachments">3.1.4. Attachments</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bug-change-policies">3.1.5. Bug Change Policies</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bugfields">3.1.6. Bug Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-bugmoving">3.1.7. Bug Moving</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-dependency-graphs">3.1.8. Dependency Graphs</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-group-security">3.1.9. Group Security</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bzldap">3.1.10. LDAP Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bzradius">3.1.11. RADIUS Authentication</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-email">3.1.12. Email</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-patchviewer">3.1.13. Patch Viewer</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-querydefaults">3.1.14. Query Defaults</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#param-shadowdatabase">3.1.15. Shadow Database</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#admin-usermatching">3.1.16. User Matching</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#useradmin">3.2. User Administration</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#defaultuser">3.2.1. Creating the Default User</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#manageusers">3.2.2. Managing Other Users</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#classifications">3.3. Classifications</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#products">3.4. Products</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#create-product">3.4.1. Creating New Products</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-products">3.4.2. Editing Products</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#comps-vers-miles-products">3.4.3. Adding or Editing Components, Versions and Target Milestones</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#product-group-controls">3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#components">3.5. Components</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#versions">3.6. Versions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#milestones">3.7. Milestones</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-overview">3.8. Flags</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-simpleexample">3.8.1. A Simple Example</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-about">3.8.2. About Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flag-askto">3.8.3. Using flag requests</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flag-types">3.8.4. Two Types of Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags-admin">3.8.5. Administering Flags</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#keywords">3.9. Keywords</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#custom-fields">3.10. Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#add-custom-fields">3.10.1. Adding Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-custom-fields">3.10.2. Editing Custom Fields</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#delete-custom-fields">3.10.3. Deleting Custom Fields</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values">3.11. Legal Values</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values-list">3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-values-delete">3.11.2. Deleting legal values</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bug_status_workflow">3.12. Bug Status Workflow</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#voting">3.13. Voting</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#quips">3.14. Quips</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#groups">3.15. Groups and Group Security</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#create-groups">3.15.1. Creating Groups</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#edit-groups">3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#users-and-groups">3.15.3. Assigning Users to Groups</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648300480">3.15.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#sanitycheck">3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="parameters"></a>3.1. Bugzilla Configuration</h2></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla is configured by changing various parameters, accessed
from the "Parameters" link in the Administration page (the
Administration page can be found by clicking the "Administration"
link in the footer). The parameters are divided into several categories,
accessed via the menu on the left. Following is a description of the
different categories and important parameters within those categories.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-requiredsettings"></a>3.1.1. Required Settings</h3></div></div></div><p>
The core required parameters for any Bugzilla installation are set
here. These parameters must be set before a new Bugzilla installation
can be used. Administrators should review this list before
deploying a new Bugzilla installation.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
maintainer
</span></dt><dd><p>
Email address of the person
responsible for maintaining this Bugzilla installation.
The address need not be that of a valid Bugzilla account.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
urlbase
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines the fully qualified domain name and web
server path to this Bugzilla installation.
</p><p>
For example, if the Bugzilla query page is
<code class="filename">http://www.foo.com/bugzilla/query.cgi</code>,
the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">urlbase</span>”</span> should be set
to <code class="filename">http://www.foo.com/bugzilla/</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
docs_urlbase
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines path to the Bugzilla documentation. This can be a fully
qualified domain name, or a path relative to "urlbase".
</p><p>
For example, if the "Bugzilla Configuration" page
of the documentation is
<code class="filename">http://www.foo.com/bugzilla/docs/html/parameters.html</code>,
set the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">docs_urlbase</span>”</span>
to <code class="filename">http://www.foo.com/bugzilla/docs/html/</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
sslbase
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines the fully qualified domain name and web
server path for HTTPS (SSL) connections to this Bugzilla installation.
</p><p>
For example, if the Bugzilla main page is
<code class="filename">https://www.foo.com/bugzilla/index.cgi</code>,
the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">sslbase</span>”</span> should be set
to <code class="filename">https://www.foo.com/bugzilla/</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
ssl_redirect
</span></dt><dd><p>
If enabled, Bugzilla will force HTTPS (SSL) connections, by
automatically redirecting any users who try to use a non-SSL
connection.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
cookiedomain
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines the domain for Bugzilla cookies. This is typically left blank.
If there are multiple hostnames that point to the same webserver, which
require the same cookie, then this parameter can be utilized. For
example, If your website is at
<code class="filename">https://www.foo.com/</code>, setting this to
<code class="filename">.foo.com/</code> will also allow
<code class="filename">bar.foo.com/</code> to access Bugzilla cookies.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
cookiepath
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines a path, relative to the web server root, that Bugzilla
cookies will be restricted to. For example, if the
<span class="command"><strong>urlbase</strong></span> is set to
<code class="filename">http://www.foo.com/bugzilla/</code>, the
<span class="command"><strong>cookiepath</strong></span> should be set to
<code class="filename">/bugzilla/</code>. Setting it to "/" will allow all sites
served by this web server or virtual host to read Bugzilla cookies.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
utf8
</span></dt><dd><p>
Determines whether to use UTF-8 (Unicode) encoding for all text in
Bugzilla. New installations should set this to true to avoid character
encoding problems. Existing databases should set this to true only
after the data has been converted from existing legacy character
encoding to UTF-8, using the
<code class="filename">contrib/recode.pl</code> script.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you turn this parameter from "off" to "on", you must re-run
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> immediately afterward.
</p></td></tr></table></div></dd><dt><span class="term">
shutdownhtml
</span></dt><dd><p>
If there is any text in this field, this Bugzilla installation will
be completely disabled and this text will appear instead of all
Bugzilla pages for all users, including Admins. Used in the event
of site maintenance or outage situations.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Although regular log-in capability is disabled while
<span class="command"><strong>shutdownhtml</strong></span>
is enabled, safeguards are in place to protect the unfortunate
admin who loses connection to Bugzilla. Should this happen to you,
go directly to the <code class="filename">editparams.cgi</code> (by typing
the URL in manually, if necessary). Doing this will prompt you to
log in, and your name/password will be accepted here (but nowhere
else).
</p></td></tr></table></div></dd><dt><span class="term">
announcehtml
</span></dt><dd><p>
Any text in this field will be displayed at the top of every HTML
page in this Bugzilla installation. The text is not wrapped in any
tags. For best results, wrap the text in a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote"><div></span>”</span>
tag. Any style attributes from the CSS can be applied. For example,
to make the text green inside of a red box, add <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">id=message</span>”</span>
to the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote"><div></span>”</span> tag.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
proxy_url
</span></dt><dd><p>
If this Bugzilla installation is behind a proxy, enter the proxy
information here to enable Bugzilla to access the Internet. Bugzilla
requires Internet access to utilize the
<span class="command"><strong>upgrade_notification</strong></span> parameter (below). If the
proxy requires authentication, use the syntax:
<code class="filename">http://user:pass@proxy_url/</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
upgrade_notification
</span></dt><dd><p>
Enable or disable a notification on the homepage of this Bugzilla
installation when a newer version of Bugzilla is available. This
notification is only visible to administrators. Choose "disabled",
to turn off the notification. Otherwise, choose which version of
Bugzilla you want to be notified about: "development_snapshot" is the
latest release on the trunk; "latest_stable_release" is the most
recent release available on the most recent stable branch;
"stable_branch_release" the most recent release on the branch
this installation is based on.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-admin-policies"></a>3.1.2. Administrative Policies</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page contains parameters for basic administrative functions.
Options include whether to allow the deletion of bugs and users,
and whether to allow users to change their email address.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-user-authentication"></a>3.1.3. User Authentication</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page contains the settings that control how this Bugzilla
installation will do its authentication. Choose what authentication
mechanism to use (the Bugzilla database, or an external source such
as LDAP), and set basic behavioral parameters. For example, choose
whether to require users to login to browse bugs, the management
of authentication cookies, and the regular expression used to
validate email addresses. Some parameters are highlighted below.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
emailregexp
</span></dt><dd><p>
Defines the regular expression used to validate email addresses
used for login names. The default attempts to match fully
qualified email addresses (i.e. 'user@example.com') in a slightly
more restrictive way than what is allowed in RFC 2822.
Some Bugzilla installations allow only local user names (i.e 'user'
instead of 'user@example.com'). In that case, this parameter
should be used to define the email domain.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
emailsuffix
</span></dt><dd><p>
This string is appended to login names when actually sending
email to a user. For example,
If <span class="command"><strong>emailregexp</strong></span> has been set to allow
local usernames,
then this parameter would contain the email domain for all users
(i.e. '@example.com').
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-attachments"></a>3.1.4. Attachments</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page allows for setting restrictions and other parameters
regarding attachments to bugs. For example, control size limitations
and whether to allow pointing to external files via a URI.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-bug-change-policies"></a>3.1.5. Bug Change Policies</h3></div></div></div><p>
Set policy on default behavior for bug change events. For example,
choose which status to set a bug to when it is marked as a duplicate,
and choose whether to allow bug reporters to set the priority or
target milestone. Also allows for configuration of what changes
should require the user to make a comment, described below.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
commenton*
</span></dt><dd><p>
All these fields allow you to dictate what changes can pass
without comment, and which must have a comment from the
person who changed them. Often, administrators will allow
users to add themselves to the CC list, accept bugs, or
change the Status Whiteboard without adding a comment as to
their reasons for the change, yet require that most other
changes come with an explanation.
</p><p>
Set the "commenton" options according to your site policy. It
is a wise idea to require comments when users resolve, reassign, or
reopen bugs at the very least.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
It is generally far better to require a developer comment
when resolving bugs than not. Few things are more annoying to bug
database users than having a developer mark a bug "fixed" without
any comment as to what the fix was (or even that it was truly
fixed!)
</p></td></tr></table></div></dd><dt><span class="term">
noresolveonopenblockers
</span></dt><dd><p>
This option will prevent users from resolving bugs as FIXED if
they have unresolved dependencies. Only the FIXED resolution
is affected. Users will be still able to resolve bugs to
resolutions other than FIXED if they have unresolved dependent
bugs.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-bugfields"></a>3.1.6. Bug Fields</h3></div></div></div><p>
The parameters in this section determine the default settings of
several Bugzilla fields for new bugs, and also control whether
certain fields are used. For example, choose whether to use the
"target milestone" field or the "status whiteboard" field.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
useqacontact
</span></dt><dd><p>
This allows you to define an email address for each component,
in addition to that of the default assignee, who will be sent
carbon copies of incoming bugs.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
usestatuswhiteboard
</span></dt><dd><p>
This defines whether you wish to have a free-form, overwritable field
associated with each bug. The advantage of the Status Whiteboard is
that it can be deleted or modified with ease, and provides an
easily-searchable field for indexing some bugs that have some trait
in common.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-bugmoving"></a>3.1.7. Bug Moving</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page controls whether this Bugzilla installation allows certain
users to move bugs to an external database. If bug moving is enabled,
there are a number of parameters that control bug moving behaviors.
For example, choose which users are allowed to move bugs, the location
of the external database, and the default product and component that
bugs moved <span class="emphasis"><em>from</em></span> other bug databases to this
Bugzilla installation are assigned to.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-dependency-graphs"></a>3.1.8. Dependency Graphs</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page has one parameter that sets the location of a Web Dot
server, or of the Web Dot binary on the local system, that is used
to generate dependency graphs. Web Dot is a CGI program that creates
images from <code class="filename">.dot</code> graphic description files. If
no Web Dot server or binary is specified, then dependency graphs will
be disabled.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-group-security"></a>3.1.9. Group Security</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla allows for the creation of different groups, with the
ability to restrict the visibility of bugs in a group to a set of
specific users. Specific products can also be associated with
groups, and users restricted to only see products in their groups.
Several parameters are described in more detail below. Most of the
configuration of groups and their relationship to products is done
on the "Groups" and "Product" pages of the "Administration" area.
The options on this page control global default behavior.
For more information on Groups and Group Security, see
<a class="xref" href="#groups" title="3.15. Groups and Group Security">Section 3.15, “Groups and Group Security”</a>
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
makeproductgroups
</span></dt><dd><p>
Determines whether or not to automatically create groups
when new products are created. If this is on, the groups will be
used for querying bugs.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
usevisibilitygroups
</span></dt><dd><p>
If selected, user visibility will be restricted to members of
groups, as selected in the group configuration settings.
Each user-defined group can be allowed to see members of selected
other groups.
For details on configuring groups (including the visibility
restrictions) see <a class="xref" href="#edit-groups" title="3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions">Section 3.15.2, “Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions”</a>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
querysharegroup
</span></dt><dd><p>
The name of the group of users who are allowed to share saved
searches with one another. For more information on using
saved searches, see <a class="xref" href="#savedsearches" title="5.10.3. Saved Searches">Saved Searches</a>.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="bzldap"></a>3.1.10. LDAP Authentication</h3></div></div></div><p>LDAP authentication is a module for Bugzilla's plugin
authentication architecture. This page contains all the parameters
necessary to configure Bugzilla for use with LDAP authentication.
</p><p>
The existing authentication
scheme for Bugzilla uses email addresses as the primary user ID, and a
password to authenticate that user. All places within Bugzilla that
require a user ID (e.g assigning a bug) use the email
address. The LDAP authentication builds on top of this scheme, rather
than replacing it. The initial log-in is done with a username and
password for the LDAP directory. Bugzilla tries to bind to LDAP using
those credentials and, if successful, tries to map this account to a
Bugzilla account. If an LDAP mail attribute is defined, the value of this
attribute is used, otherwise the "emailsuffix" parameter is appended to LDAP
username to form a full email address. If an account for this address
already exists in the Bugzilla installation, it will log in to that account.
If no account for that email address exists, one is created at the time
of login. (In this case, Bugzilla will attempt to use the "displayName"
or "cn" attribute to determine the user's full name.) After
authentication, all other user-related tasks are still handled by email
address, not LDAP username. For example, bugs are still assigned by
email address and users are still queried by email address.
</p><div class="caution" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Caution"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Caution]" src="../images/caution.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Because the Bugzilla account is not created until the first time
a user logs in, a user who has not yet logged is unknown to Bugzilla.
This means they cannot be used as an assignee or QA contact (default or
otherwise), added to any CC list, or any other such operation. One
possible workaround is the <code class="filename">bugzilla_ldapsync.rb</code>
script in the
<a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-contrib"><em class="glossterm">
<code class="filename">contrib</code></em></a>
directory. Another possible solution is fixing
<a class="ulink" href="https://bugzilla.mozilla.org/show_bug.cgi?id=201069" target="_top">bug
201069</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>Parameters required to use LDAP Authentication:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><a name="param-user_verify_class_for_ldap"></a><span class="term">user_verify_class</span></dt><dd><p>If you want to list <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">LDAP</span>”</span> here,
make sure to have set up the other parameters listed below.
Unless you have other (working) authentication methods listed as
well, you may otherwise not be able to log back in to Bugzilla once
you log out.
If this happens to you, you will need to manually edit
<code class="filename">data/params</code> and set user_verify_class to
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">DB</span>”</span>.
</p></dd><dt><a name="param-LDAPserver"></a><span class="term">LDAPserver</span></dt><dd><p>This parameter should be set to the name (and optionally the
port) of your LDAP server. If no port is specified, it assumes
the default LDAP port of 389.
</p><p>For example: <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ldap.company.com</span>”</span>
or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ldap.company.com:3268</span>”</span>
</p><p>You can also specify a LDAP URI, so as to use other
protocols, such as LDAPS or LDAPI. If port was not specified in
the URI, the default is either 389 or 636 for 'LDAP' and 'LDAPS'
schemes respectively.
</p><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
In order to use SSL with LDAP, specify a URI with "ldaps://".
This will force the use of SSL over port 636.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>For example, normal LDAP:
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ldap://ldap.company.com</span>”</span>, LDAP over SSL:
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ldaps://ldap.company.com</span>”</span> or LDAP over a UNIX
domain socket <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ldapi://%2fvar%2flib%2fldap_sock</span>”</span>.
</p></dd><dt><a name="param-LDAPbinddn"></a><span class="term">LDAPbinddn [Optional]</span></dt><dd><p>Some LDAP servers will not allow an anonymous bind to search
the directory. If this is the case with your configuration you
should set the LDAPbinddn parameter to the user account Bugzilla
should use instead of the anonymous bind.
</p><p>Ex. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">cn=default,cn=user:password</span>”</span></p></dd><dt><a name="param-LDAPBaseDN"></a><span class="term">LDAPBaseDN</span></dt><dd><p>The LDAPBaseDN parameter should be set to the location in
your LDAP tree that you would like to search for email addresses.
Your uids should be unique under the DN specified here.
</p><p>Ex. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ou=People,o=Company</span>”</span></p></dd><dt><a name="param-LDAPuidattribute"></a><span class="term">LDAPuidattribute</span></dt><dd><p>The LDAPuidattribute parameter should be set to the attribute
which contains the unique UID of your users. The value retrieved
from this attribute will be used when attempting to bind as the
user to confirm their password.
</p><p>Ex. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">uid</span>”</span></p></dd><dt><a name="param-LDAPmailattribute"></a><span class="term">LDAPmailattribute</span></dt><dd><p>The LDAPmailattribute parameter should be the name of the
attribute which contains the email address your users will enter
into the Bugzilla login boxes.
</p><p>Ex. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">mail</span>”</span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="bzradius"></a>3.1.11. RADIUS Authentication</h3></div></div></div><p>
RADIUS authentication is a module for Bugzilla's plugin
authentication architecture. This page contains all the parameters
necessary for configuring Bugzilla to use RADIUS authentication.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Most caveats that apply to LDAP authentication apply to RADIUS
authentication as well. See <a class="xref" href="#bzldap" title="3.1.10. LDAP Authentication">Section 3.1.10, “LDAP Authentication”</a> for details.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>Parameters required to use RADIUS Authentication:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><a name="param-user_verify_class_for_radius"></a><span class="term">user_verify_class</span></dt><dd><p>If you want to list <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">RADIUS</span>”</span> here,
make sure to have set up the other parameters listed below.
Unless you have other (working) authentication methods listed as
well, you may otherwise not be able to log back in to Bugzilla once
you log out.
If this happens to you, you will need to manually edit
<code class="filename">data/params</code> and set user_verify_class to
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">DB</span>”</span>.
</p></dd><dt><a name="param-RADIUS_server"></a><span class="term">RADIUS_server</span></dt><dd><p>This parameter should be set to the name (and optionally the
port) of your RADIUS server.
</p></dd><dt><a name="param-RADIUS_secret"></a><span class="term">RADIUS_secret</span></dt><dd><p>This parameter should be set to the RADIUS server's secret.
</p></dd><dt><a name="param-RADIUS_email_suffix"></a><span class="term">RADIUS_email_suffix</span></dt><dd><p>Bugzilla needs an e-mail address for each user account.
Therefore, it needs to determine the e-mail address corresponding
to a RADIUS user.
Bugzilla offers only a simple way to do this: it can concatenate
a suffix to the RADIUS user name to convert it into an e-mail
address.
You can specify this suffix in the RADIUS_email_suffix parameter.
</p><p>If this simple solution does not work for you, you'll
probably need to modify
<code class="filename">Bugzilla/Auth/Verify/RADIUS.pm</code> to match your
requirements.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-email"></a>3.1.12. Email</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page contains all of the parameters for configuring how
Bugzilla deals with the email notifications it sends. See below
for a summary of important options.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
mail_delivery_method
</span></dt><dd><p>
This is used to specify how email is sent, or if it is sent at
all. There are several options included for different MTAs,
along with two additional options that disable email sending.
"Test" does not send mail, but instead saves it in
<code class="filename">data/mailer.testfile</code> for later review.
"None" disables email sending entirely.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
mailfrom
</span></dt><dd><p>
This is the email address that will appear in the "From" field
of all emails sent by this Bugzilla installation. Some email
servers require mail to be from a valid email address, therefore
it is recommended to choose a valid email address here.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
smtpserver
</span></dt><dd><p>
This is the SMTP server address, if the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">mail_delivery_method</span>”</span>
parameter is set to SMTP. Use "localhost" if you have a local MTA
running, otherwise use a remote SMTP server. Append ":" and the port
number, if a non-default port is needed.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
smtp_username
</span></dt><dd><p>
Username to use for SASL authentication to the SMTP server. Leave
this parameter empty if your server does not require authentication.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
smtp_password
</span></dt><dd><p>
Password to use for SASL authentication to the SMTP server. This
parameter will be ignored if the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">smtp_username</span>”</span>
parameter is left empty.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
smtp_ssl
</span></dt><dd><p>
Enable SSL support for connection to the SMTP server.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
smtp_debug
</span></dt><dd><p>
This parameter allows you to enable detailed debugging output.
Log messages are printed the web server's error log.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
whinedays
</span></dt><dd><p>
Set this to the number of days you want to let bugs go
in the CONFIRMED state before notifying people they have
untouched new bugs. If you do not plan to use this feature, simply
do not set up the whining cron job described in the installation
instructions, or set this value to "0" (never whine).
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
globalwatcher
</span></dt><dd><p>
This allows you to define specific users who will
receive notification each time a new bug in entered, or when
an existing bug changes, according to the normal groupset
permissions. It may be useful for sending notifications to a
mailing-list, for instance.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-patchviewer"></a>3.1.13. Patch Viewer</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page contains configuration parameters for the CVS server,
Bonsai server and LXR server that Bugzilla will use to enable the
features of the Patch Viewer. Bonsai is a tool that enables queries
to a CVS tree. LXR is a tool that can cross reference and index source
code.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-querydefaults"></a>3.1.14. Query Defaults</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page controls the default behavior of Bugzilla in regards to
several aspects of querying bugs. Options include what the default
query options are, what the "My Bugs" page returns, whether users
can freely add bugs to the quip list, and how many duplicate bugs are
needed to add a bug to the "most frequently reported" list.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="param-shadowdatabase"></a>3.1.15. Shadow Database</h3></div></div></div><p>
This page controls whether a shadow database is used, and all the
parameters associated with the shadow database. Versions of Bugzilla
prior to 3.2 used the MyISAM table type, which supports
only table-level write locking. With MyISAM, any time someone is making a change to
a bug, the entire table is locked until the write operation is complete.
Locking for write also blocks reads until the write is complete.
</p><p>
The <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">shadowdb</span>”</span> parameter was designed to get around
this limitation. While only a single user is allowed to write to
a table at a time, reads can continue unimpeded on a read-only
shadow copy of the database.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
As of version 3.2, Bugzilla no longer uses the MyISAM table type.
Instead, InnoDB is used, which can do transaction-based locking.
Therefore, the limitations the Shadow Database feature was designed
to workaround no longer exist.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="admin-usermatching"></a>3.1.16. User Matching</h3></div></div></div><p>
The settings on this page control how users are selected and queried
when adding a user to a bug. For example, users need to be selected
when choosing who the bug is assigned to, adding to the CC list or
selecting a QA contact. With the "usemenuforusers" parameter, it is
possible to configure Bugzilla to
display a list of users in the fields instead of an empty text field.
This should only be used in Bugzilla installations with a small number
of users. If users are selected via a text box, this page also
contains parameters for how user names can be queried and matched
when entered.
</p><p>
Another setting called 'ajax_user_autocompletion' enables certain
user fields to display a list of matched user names as a drop down after typing
a few characters. Note that it is recommended to use mod_perl when
enabling 'ajax_user_autocompletion'.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="useradmin"></a>3.2. User Administration</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="defaultuser"></a>3.2.1. Creating the Default User</h3></div></div></div><p>When you first run checksetup.pl after installing Bugzilla, it
will prompt you for the administrative username (email address) and
password for this "super user". If for some reason you delete
the "super user" account, re-running checksetup.pl will again prompt
you for this username and password.</p><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>If you wish to add more administrative users, add them to
the "admin" group and, optionally, edit the tweakparams, editusers,
creategroups, editcomponents, and editkeywords groups to add the
entire admin group to those groups (which is the case by default).
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="manageusers"></a>3.2.2. Managing Other Users</h3></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="user-account-search"></a>3.2.2.1. Searching for existing users</h4></div></div></div><p>
If you have <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">editusers</span>”</span> privileges or if you are allowed
to grant privileges for some groups, the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Users</span>”</span> link
will appear in the Administration page.
</p><p>
The first screen is a search form to search for existing user
accounts. You can run searches based either on the user ID, real
name or login name (i.e. the email address, or just the first part
of the email address if the "emailsuffix" parameter is set).
The search can be conducted
in different ways using the listbox to the right of the text entry
box. You can match by case-insensitive substring (the default),
regular expression, a <span class="emphasis"><em>reverse</em></span> regular expression
match (which finds every user name which does NOT match the regular
expression), or the exact string if you know exactly who you are
looking for. The search can be restricted to users who are in a
specific group. By default, the restriction is turned off.
</p><p>
The search returns a list of
users matching your criteria. User properties can be edited by clicking
the login name. The Account History of a user can be viewed by clicking
the "View" link in the Account History column. The Account History
displays changes that have been made to the user account, the time of
the change and the user who made the change. For example, the Account
History page will display details of when a user was added or removed
from a group.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="createnewusers"></a>3.2.2.2. Creating new users</h4></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="self-registration"></a>3.2.2.2.1. Self-registration</h5></div></div></div><p>
By default, users can create their own user accounts by clicking the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">New Account</span>”</span> link at the bottom of each page (assuming
they aren't logged in as someone else already). If you want to disable
this self-registration, or if you want to restrict who can create his
own user account, you have to edit the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">createemailregexp</span>”</span>
parameter in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Configuration</span>”</span> page, see
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="user-account-creation"></a>3.2.2.2.2. Accounts created by an administrator</h5></div></div></div><p>
Users with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">editusers</span>”</span> privileges, such as administrators,
can create user accounts for other users:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>After logging in, click the "Users" link at the footer of
the query page, and then click "Add a new user".</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Fill out the form presented. This page is self-explanatory.
When done, click "Submit".</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Adding a user this way will <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span>
send an email informing them of their username and password.
While useful for creating dummy accounts (watchers which
shuttle mail to another system, for instance, or email
addresses which are a mailing list), in general it is
preferable to log out and use the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">New Account</span>”</span>
button to create users, as it will pre-populate all the
required fields and also notify the user of her account name
and password.</p></td></tr></table></div></li></ol></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="modifyusers"></a>3.2.2.3. Modifying Users</h4></div></div></div><p>Once you have found your user, you can change the following
fields:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Login Name</em></span>:
This is generally the user's full email address. However, if you
are using the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">emailsuffix</span>”</span> parameter, this may
just be the user's login name. Note that users can now change their
login names themselves (to any valid email address).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Real Name</em></span>: The user's real name. Note that
Bugzilla does not require this to create an account.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Password</em></span>:
You can change the user's password here. Users can automatically
request a new password, so you shouldn't need to do this often.
If you want to disable an account, see Disable Text below.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Bugmail Disabled</em></span>:
Mark this checkbox to disable bugmail and whinemail completely
for this account. This checkbox replaces the data/nomail file
which existed in older versions of Bugzilla.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Disable Text</em></span>:
If you type anything in this box, including just a space, the
user is prevented from logging in, or making any changes to
bugs via the web interface.
The HTML you type in this box is presented to the user when
they attempt to perform these actions, and should explain
why the account was disabled.
</p><p>
Users with disabled accounts will continue to receive
mail from Bugzilla; furthermore, they will not be able
to log in themselves to change their own preferences and
stop it. If you want an account (disabled or active) to
stop receiving mail, simply check the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Bugmail Disabled</span>”</span> checkbox above.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Even users whose accounts have been disabled can still
submit bugs via the e-mail gateway, if one exists.
The e-mail gateway should <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> be
enabled for secure installations of Bugzilla.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Don't disable all the administrator accounts!
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em><groupname></em></span>:
If you have created some groups, e.g. "securitysensitive", then
checkboxes will appear here to allow you to add users to, or
remove them from, these groups. The first checkbox gives the
user the ability to add and remove other users as members of
this group. The second checkbox adds the user himself as a member
of the group.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>canconfirm</em></span>:
This field is only used if you have enabled the "unconfirmed"
status. If you enable this for a user,
that user can then move bugs from "Unconfirmed" to a "Confirmed"
status (e.g.: "New" status).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>creategroups</em></span>:
This option will allow a user to create and destroy groups in
Bugzilla.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>editbugs</em></span>:
Unless a user has this bit set, they can only edit those bugs
for which they are the assignee or the reporter. Even if this
option is unchecked, users can still add comments to bugs.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>editcomponents</em></span>:
This flag allows a user to create new products and components,
as well as modify and destroy those that have no bugs associated
with them. If a product or component has bugs associated with it,
those bugs must be moved to a different product or component
before Bugzilla will allow them to be destroyed.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>editkeywords</em></span>:
If you use Bugzilla's keyword functionality, enabling this
feature allows a user to create and destroy keywords. As always,
the keywords for existing bugs containing the keyword the user
wishes to destroy must be changed before Bugzilla will allow it
to die.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>editusers</em></span>:
This flag allows a user to do what you're doing right now: edit
other users. This will allow those with the right to do so to
remove administrator privileges from other users or grant them to
themselves. Enable with care.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>tweakparams</em></span>:
This flag allows a user to change Bugzilla's Params
(using <code class="filename">editparams.cgi</code>.)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em><productname></em></span>:
This allows an administrator to specify the products
in which a user can see bugs. If you turn on the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">makeproductgroups</span>”</span> parameter in
the Group Security Panel in the Parameters page,
then Bugzilla creates one group per product (at the time you create
the product), and this group has exactly the same name as the
product itself. Note that for products that already exist when
the parameter is turned on, the corresponding group will not be
created. The user must still have the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">editbugs</span>”</span>
privilege to edit bugs in these products.</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="user-account-deletion"></a>3.2.2.4. Deleting Users</h4></div></div></div><p>
If the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">allowuserdeletion</span>”</span> parameter is turned on, see
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>, then you can also delete user accounts.
Note that this is most of the time not the best thing to do. If only
a warning in a yellow box is displayed, then the deletion is safe.
If a warning is also displayed in a red box, then you should NOT try
to delete the user account, else you will get referential integrity
problems in your database, which can lead to unexpected behavior,
such as bugs not appearing in bug lists anymore, or data displaying
incorrectly. You have been warned!
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="impersonatingusers"></a>3.2.2.5. Impersonating Users</h4></div></div></div><p>
There may be times when an administrator would like to do something as
another user. The <span class="command"><strong>sudo</strong></span> feature may be used to do
this.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
To use the sudo feature, you must be in the
<span class="emphasis"><em>bz_sudoers</em></span> group. By default, all
administrators are in this group.</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
If you have access to this feature, you may start a session by
going to the Edit Users page, Searching for a user and clicking on
their login. You should see a link below their login name titled
"Impersonate this user". Click on the link. This will take you
to a page where you will see a description of the feature and
instructions for using it. After reading the text, simply
enter the login of the user you would like to impersonate, provide
a short message explaining why you are doing this, and press the
button.</p><p>
As long as you are using this feature, everything you do will be done
as if you were logged in as the user you are impersonating.</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The user you are impersonating will not be told about what you are
doing. If you do anything that results in mail being sent, that
mail will appear to be from the user you are impersonating. You
should be extremely careful while using this feature.</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="classifications"></a>3.3. Classifications</h2></div></div></div><p>Classifications tend to be used in order to group several related
products into one distinct entity.</p><p>The classifications layer is disabled by default; it can be turned
on or off using the useclassification parameter,
in the <span class="emphasis"><em>Bug Fields</em></span> section of the edit parameters screen.</p><p>Access to the administration of classifications is controlled using
the <span class="emphasis"><em>editclassifications</em></span> system group, which defines
a privilege for creating, destroying, and editing classifications.</p><p>When activated, classifications will introduce an additional
step when filling bugs (dedicated to classification selection), and they
will also appear in the advanced search form.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="products"></a>3.4. Products</h2></div></div></div><p>
<a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-product"><em class="glossterm">
Products</em></a> typically represent real-world
shipping products. Products can be given
<a class="xref" href="#classifications" title="3.3. Classifications">Classifications</a>.
For example, if a company makes computer games,
they could have a classification of "Games", and a separate
product for each game. This company might also have a
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Common</span>”</span> product for units of technology used
in multiple games, and perhaps a few special products that
represent items that are not actually shipping products
(for example, "Website", or "Administration").
</p><p>
Many of Bugzilla's settings are configurable on a per-product
basis. The number of <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">votes</span>”</span> available to
users is set per-product, as is the number of votes
required to move a bug automatically from the UNCONFIRMED
status to the CONFIRMED status.
</p><p>
When creating or editing products the following options are
available:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
Product
</span></dt><dd><p>
The name of the product
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Description
</span></dt><dd><p>
A brief description of the product
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Default milestone
</span></dt><dd><p>
Select the default milestone for this product.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Closed for bug entry
</span></dt><dd><p>
Select this box to prevent new bugs from being
entered against this product.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Maximum votes per person
</span></dt><dd><p>
Maximum votes a user is allowed to give for this
product
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Maximum votes a person can put on a single bug
</span></dt><dd><p>
Maximum votes a user is allowed to give for this
product in a single bug
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Confirmation threshold
</span></dt><dd><p>
Number of votes needed to automatically remove any
bug against this product from the UNCONFIRMED state
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Version
</span></dt><dd><p>
Specify which version of the product bugs will be
entered against.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
Create chart datasets for this product
</span></dt><dd><p>
Select to make chart datasets available for this product.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
When editing a product there is also a link to edit Group Access Controls,
see <a class="xref" href="#product-group-controls" title="3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products">Section 3.4.4, “Assigning Group Controls to Products”</a>.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="create-product"></a>3.4.1. Creating New Products</h3></div></div></div><p>
To create a new product:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
Select <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administration</span>”</span> from the footer and then
choose <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Products</span>”</span> from the main administration page.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Add</span>”</span> link in the bottom right.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Enter the name of the product and a description. The
Description field may contain HTML.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
When the product is created, Bugzilla will give a message
stating that a component must be created before any bugs can
be entered against the new product. Follow the link to create
a new component. See <a class="xref" href="#components" title="3.5. Components">Components</a> for more
information.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="edit-products"></a>3.4.2. Editing Products</h3></div></div></div><p>
To edit an existing product, click the "Products" link from the
"Administration" page. If the 'useclassification' parameter is
turned on, a table of existing classifications is displayed,
including an "Unclassified" category. The table indicates how many products
are in each classification. Click on the classification name to see its
products. If the 'useclassification' parameter is not in use, the table
lists all products directly. The product table summarizes the information
about the product defined
when the product was created. Click on the product name to edit these
properties, and to access links to other product attributes such as the
product's components, versions, milestones, and group access controls.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="comps-vers-miles-products"></a>3.4.3. Adding or Editing Components, Versions and Target Milestones</h3></div></div></div><p>
To edit existing, or add new, Components, Versions or Target Milestones
to a Product, select the "Edit Components", "Edit Versions" or "Edit
Milestones" links from the "Edit Product" page. A table of existing
Components, Versions or Milestones is displayed. Click on a item name
to edit the properties of that item. Below the table is a link to add
a new Component, Version or Milestone.
</p><p>
For more information on components, see <a class="xref" href="#components" title="3.5. Components">Components</a>.
</p><p>
For more information on versions, see <a class="xref" href="#versions" title="3.6. Versions">Section 3.6, “Versions”</a>.
</p><p>
For more information on milestones, see <a class="xref" href="#milestones" title="3.7. Milestones">Section 3.7, “Milestones”</a>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="product-group-controls"></a>3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</h3></div></div></div><p>
On the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit Product</span>”</span> page, there is a link called
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit Group Access Controls</span>”</span>. The settings on this page
control the relationship of the groups to the product being edited.
</p><p>
Group Access Controls are an important aspect of using groups for
isolating products and restricting access to bugs filed against those
products. For more information on groups, including how to create, edit
add users to, and alter permission of, see <a class="xref" href="#groups" title="3.15. Groups and Group Security">Section 3.15, “Groups and Group Security”</a>.
</p><p>
After selecting the "Edit Group Access Controls" link from the "Edit
Product" page, a table containing all user-defined groups for this
Bugzilla installation is displayed. The system groups that are created
when Bugzilla is installed are not applicable to Group Access Controls.
Below is description of what each of these fields means.
</p><p>
Groups may be applicable (e.g bugs in this product can be associated
with this group) , default (e.g. bugs in this product are in this group
by default), and mandatory (e.g. bugs in this product must be associated
with this group) for each product. Groups can also control access
to bugs for a given product, or be used to make bugs for a product
totally read-only unless the group restrictions are met. The best way to
understand these relationships is by example. See
<a class="xref" href="#group-control-examples" title="3.4.4.1. Common Applications of Group Controls">Section 3.4.4.1, “Common Applications of Group Controls”</a> for examples of
product and group relationships.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Products and Groups are not limited to a one-to-one relationship.
Multiple groups can be associated with the same product, and groups
can be associated with more than one product.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
If any group has <span class="emphasis"><em>Entry</em></span> selected, then the
product will restrict bug entry to only those users
who are members of <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> the groups with
<span class="emphasis"><em>Entry</em></span> selected.
</p><p>
If any group has <span class="emphasis"><em>Canedit</em></span> selected,
then the product will be read-only for any users
who are not members of <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> of the groups with
<span class="emphasis"><em>Canedit</em></span> selected. <span class="emphasis"><em>Only</em></span> users who
are members of all the <span class="emphasis"><em>Canedit</em></span> groups
will be able to edit bugs for this product. This is an additional
restriction that enables finer-grained control over products rather
than just all-or-nothing access levels.
</p><p>
The following settings let you
choose privileges on a <span class="emphasis"><em>per-product basis</em></span>.
This is a convenient way to give privileges to
some users for some products only, without having
to give them global privileges which would affect
all products.
</p><p>
Any group having <span class="emphasis"><em>editcomponents</em></span>
selected allows users who are in this group to edit all
aspects of this product, including components, milestones
and versions.
</p><p>
Any group having <span class="emphasis"><em>canconfirm</em></span> selected
allows users who are in this group to confirm bugs
in this product.
</p><p>
Any group having <span class="emphasis"><em>editbugs</em></span> selected allows
users who are in this group to edit all fields of
bugs in this product.
</p><p>
The <span class="emphasis"><em>MemberControl</em></span> and
<span class="emphasis"><em>OtherControl</em></span> are used in tandem to determine which
bugs will be placed in this group. The only allowable combinations of
these two parameters are listed in a table on the "Edit Group Access Controls"
page. Consult this table for details on how these fields can be used.
Examples of different uses are described below.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="group-control-examples"></a>3.4.4.1. Common Applications of Group Controls</h4></div></div></div><p>
The use of groups is best explained by providing examples that illustrate
configurations for common use cases. The examples follow a common syntax:
<span class="emphasis"><em>Group: Entry, MemberControl, OtherControl, CanEdit,
EditComponents, CanConfirm, EditBugs</em></span>. Where "Group" is the name
of the group being edited for this product. The other fields all
correspond to the table on the "Edit Group Access Controls" page. If any
of these options are not listed, it means they are not checked.
</p><p>
Basic Product/Group Restriction
</p><p>
Suppose there is a product called "Bar". The
"Bar" product can only have bugs entered against it by users in the
group "Foo". Additionally, bugs filed against product "Bar" must stay
restricted to users to "Foo" at all times. Furthermore, only members
of group "Foo" can edit bugs filed against product "Bar", even if other
users could see the bug. This arrangement would achieved by the
following:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product Bar:
foo: ENTRY, MANDATORY/MANDATORY, CANEDIT
</pre><p>
Perhaps such strict restrictions are not needed for product "Bar". A
more lenient way to configure product "Bar" and group "Foo" would be:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product Bar:
foo: ENTRY, SHOWN/SHOWN, EDITCOMPONENTS, CANCONFIRM, EDITBUGS
</pre><p>
The above indicates that for product "Bar", members of group "Foo" can
enter bugs. Any one with permission to edit a bug against product "Bar"
can put the bug
in group "Foo", even if they themselves are not in "Foo". Anyone in group
"Foo" can edit all aspects of the components of product "Bar", can confirm
bugs against product "Bar", and can edit all fields of any bug against
product "Bar".
</p><p>
General User Access With Security Group
</p><p>
To permit any user to file bugs against "Product A",
and to permit any user to submit those bugs into a
group called "Security":
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product A:
security: SHOWN/SHOWN
</pre><p>
General User Access With A Security Product
</p><p>
To permit any user to file bugs against product called "Security"
while keeping those bugs from becoming visible to anyone
outside the group "SecurityWorkers" (unless a member of the
"SecurityWorkers" group removes that restriction):
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product Security:
securityworkers: DEFAULT/MANDATORY
</pre><p>
Product Isolation With a Common Group
</p><p>
To permit users of "Product A" to access the bugs for
"Product A", users of "Product B" to access the bugs for
"Product B", and support staff, who are members of the "Support
Group" to access both, three groups are needed:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Support Group: Contains members of the support staff.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>AccessA Group: Contains users of product A and the Support group.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>AccessB Group: Contains users of product B and the Support group.</p></li></ol></div><p>
Once these three groups are defined, the product group controls
can be set to:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product A:
AccessA: ENTRY, MANDATORY/MANDATORY
Product B:
AccessB: ENTRY, MANDATORY/MANDATORY
</pre><p>
Perhaps the "Support Group" wants more control. For example,
the "Support Group" could be permitted to make bugs inaccessible to
users of both groups "AccessA" and "AccessB".
Then, the "Support Group" could be permitted to publish
bugs relevant to all users in a third product (let's call it
"Product Common") that is read-only
to anyone outside the "Support Group". In this way the "Support Group"
could control bugs that should be seen by both groups.
That configuration would be:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product A:
AccessA: ENTRY, MANDATORY/MANDATORY
Support: SHOWN/NA
Product B:
AccessB: ENTRY, MANDATORY/MANDATORY
Support: SHOWN/NA
Product Common:
Support: ENTRY, DEFAULT/MANDATORY, CANEDIT
</pre><p>
Make a Product Read Only
</p><p>
Sometimes a product is retired and should no longer have
new bugs filed against it (for example, an older version of a software
product that is no longer supported). A product can be made read-only
by creating a group called "readonly" and adding products to the
group as needed:
</p><pre class="programlisting">
Product A:
ReadOnly: ENTRY, NA/NA, CANEDIT
</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
For more information on Groups outside of how they relate to products
see <a class="xref" href="#groups" title="3.15. Groups and Group Security">Section 3.15, “Groups and Group Security”</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="components"></a>3.5. Components</h2></div></div></div><p>Components are subsections of a Product. E.g. the computer game
you are designing may have a "UI"
component, an "API" component, a "Sound System" component, and a
"Plugins" component, each overseen by a different programmer. It
often makes sense to divide Components in Bugzilla according to the
natural divisions of responsibility within your Product or
company.</p><p>
Each component has a default assignee and (if you turned it on in the parameters),
a QA Contact. The default assignee should be the primary person who fixes bugs in
that component. The QA Contact should be the person who will ensure
these bugs are completely fixed. The Assignee, QA Contact, and Reporter
will get email when new bugs are created in this Component and when
these bugs change. Default Assignee and Default QA Contact fields only
dictate the
<span class="emphasis"><em>default assignments</em></span>;
these can be changed on bug submission, or at any later point in
a bug's life.</p><p>To create a new Component:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit components</span>”</span> link
from the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit product</span>”</span> page</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Add</span>”</span> link in the bottom right.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Fill out the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Component</span>”</span> field, a
short <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Description</span>”</span>, the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Default Assignee</span>”</span>, <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Default CC List</span>”</span>
and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Default QA Contact</span>”</span> (if enabled).
The <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Component Description</span>”</span> field may contain a
limited subset of HTML tags. The <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Default Assignee</span>”</span>
field must be a login name already existing in the Bugzilla database.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="versions"></a>3.6. Versions</h2></div></div></div><p>Versions are the revisions of the product, such as "Flinders
3.1", "Flinders 95", and "Flinders 2000". Version is not a multi-select
field; the usual practice is to select the earliest version known to have
the bug.
</p><p>To create and edit Versions:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>From the "Edit product" screen, select "Edit Versions"</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>You will notice that the product already has the default
version "undefined". Click the "Add" link in the bottom right.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Enter the name of the Version. This field takes text only.
Then click the "Add" button.</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="milestones"></a>3.7. Milestones</h2></div></div></div><p>Milestones are "targets" that you plan to get a bug fixed by. For
example, you have a bug that you plan to fix for your 3.0 release, it
would be assigned the milestone of 3.0.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Milestone options will only appear for a Product if you turned
on the "usetargetmilestone" parameter in the "Bug Fields" tab of the
"Parameters" page.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>To create new Milestones, and set Default Milestones:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Select "Edit milestones" from the "Edit product" page.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Select "Add" in the bottom right corner.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Enter the name of the Milestone in the "Milestone" field. You
can optionally set the "sortkey", which is a positive or negative
number (-32768 to 32767) that defines where in the list this particular
milestone appears. This is because milestones often do not
occur in alphanumeric order For example, "Future" might be
after "Release 1.2". Select "Add".</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="flags-overview"></a>3.8. Flags</h2></div></div></div><p>
Flags are a way to attach a specific status to a bug or attachment,
either <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span> or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>. The meaning of these symbols depends on the text
the flag itself, but contextually they could mean pass/fail,
accept/reject, approved/denied, or even a simple yes/no. If your site
allows requestable flags, then users may set a flag to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span> as a
request to another user that they look at the bug/attachment, and set
the flag to its correct status.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="flags-simpleexample"></a>3.8.1. A Simple Example</h3></div></div></div><p>
A developer might want to ask their manager,
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Should we fix this bug before we release version 2.0?</span>”</span>
They might want to do this for a <span class="emphasis"><em>lot</em></span> of bugs,
so it would be nice to streamline the process...
</p><p>
In Bugzilla, it would work this way:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
The Bugzilla administrator creates a flag type called
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">blocking2.0</span>”</span> that shows up on all bugs in
your product.
</p><p>
It shows up on the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Show Bug</span>”</span> screen
as the text <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">blocking2.0</span>”</span> with a drop-down box next
to it. The drop-down box contains four values: an empty space,
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span>, <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>, and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span>.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The developer sets the flag to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
The manager sees the <code class="computeroutput">blocking2.0</code>
flag with a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span> value.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
If the manager thinks the feature should go into the product
before version 2.0 can be released, he sets the flag to
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span>. Otherwise, he sets it to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Now, every Bugzilla user who looks at the bug knows whether or
not the bug needs to be fixed before release of version 2.0.
</p></li></ol></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="flags-about"></a>3.8.2. About Flags</h3></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flag-values"></a>3.8.2.1. Values</h4></div></div></div><p>
Flags can have three values:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput">?</code></span></dt><dd>
A user is requesting that a status be set. (Think of it as 'A question is being asked'.)
</dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput">-</code></span></dt><dd>
The status has been set negatively. (The question has been answered <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">no</span>”</span>.)
</dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput">+</code></span></dt><dd>
The status has been set positively.
(The question has been answered <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">yes</span>”</span>.)
</dd></dl></div><p>
</p><p>
Actually, there's a fourth value a flag can have --
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">unset</span>”</span> -- which shows up as a blank space. This
just means that nobody has expressed an opinion (or asked
someone else to express an opinion) about this bug or attachment.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="flag-askto"></a>3.8.3. Using flag requests</h3></div></div></div><p>
If a flag has been defined as 'requestable', and a user has enough privileges
to request it (see below), the user can set the flag's status to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span>.
This status indicates that someone (a.k.a. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">the requester</span>”</span>) is asking
someone else to set the flag to either <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span> or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>.
</p><p>
If a flag has been defined as 'specifically requestable',
a text box will appear next to the flag into which the requester may
enter a Bugzilla username. That named person (a.k.a. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">the requestee</span>”</span>)
will receive an email notifying them of the request, and pointing them
to the bug/attachment in question.
</p><p>
If a flag has <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> been defined as 'specifically requestable',
then no such text-box will appear. A request to set this flag cannot be made of
any specific individual, but must be asked <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">to the wind</span>”</span>.
A requester may <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">ask the wind</span>”</span> on any flag simply by leaving the text-box blank.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="flag-types"></a>3.8.4. Two Types of Flags</h3></div></div></div><p>
Flags can go in two places: on an attachment, or on a bug.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flag-type-attachment"></a>3.8.4.1. Attachment Flags</h4></div></div></div><p>
Attachment flags are used to ask a question about a specific
attachment on a bug.
</p><p>
Many Bugzilla installations use this to
request that one developer <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">review</span>”</span> another
developer's code before they check it in. They attach the code to
a bug report, and then set a flag on that attachment called
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">review</span>”</span> to
<code class="computeroutput">review?boss@domain.com</code>.
boss@domain.com is then notified by email that
he has to check out that attachment and approve it or deny it.
</p><p>
For a Bugzilla user, attachment flags show up in three places:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
On the list of attachments in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Show Bug</span>”</span>
screen, you can see the current state of any flags that
have been set to ?, +, or -. You can see who asked about
the flag (the requester), and who is being asked (the
requestee).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
When you <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit</span>”</span> an attachment, you can
see any settable flag, along with any flags that have
already been set. This <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit Attachment</span>”</span>
screen is where you set flags to ?, -, +, or unset them.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Requests are listed in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Request Queue</span>”</span>, which
is accessible from the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">My Requests</span>”</span> link (if you are
logged in) or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Requests</span>”</span> link (if you are logged out)
visible in the footer of all pages.
</p></li></ol></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flag-type-bug"></a>3.8.4.2. Bug Flags</h4></div></div></div><p>
Bug flags are used to set a status on the bug itself. You can
see Bug Flags in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Show Bug</span>”</span> and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Requests</span>”</span>
screens, as described above.
</p><p>
Only users with enough privileges (see below) may set flags on bugs.
This doesn't necessarily include the assignee, reporter, or users with the
<code class="computeroutput">editbugs</code> permission.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="flags-admin"></a>3.8.5. Administering Flags</h3></div></div></div><p>
If you have the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">editcomponents</span>”</span> permission, you can
edit Flag Types from the main administration page. Clicking the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Flags</span>”</span> link will bring you to the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administer
Flag Types</span>”</span> page. Here, you can select whether you want
to create (or edit) a Bug flag, or an Attachment flag.
</p><p>
No matter which you choose, the interface is the same, so we'll
just go over it once.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flags-edit"></a>3.8.5.1. Editing a Flag</h4></div></div></div><p>
To edit a flag's properties, just click the flag's name.
That will take you to the same
form as described below (<a class="xref" href="#flags-create" title="3.8.5.2. Creating a Flag">Section 3.8.5.2, “Creating a Flag”</a>).
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flags-create"></a>3.8.5.2. Creating a Flag</h4></div></div></div><p>
When you click on the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Create a Flag Type for...</span>”</span>
link, you will be presented with a form. Here is what the fields in
the form mean:
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-name"></a>3.8.5.2.1. Name</h5></div></div></div><p>
This is the name of the flag. This will be displayed
to Bugzilla users who are looking at or setting the flag.
The name may contain any valid Unicode characters except commas
and spaces.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-description"></a>3.8.5.2.2. Description</h5></div></div></div><p>
The description describes the flag in more detail. It is visible
in a tooltip when hovering over a flag either in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Show Bug</span>”</span>
or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Edit Attachment</span>”</span> pages. This field can be as
long as you like, and can contain any character you want.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-category"></a>3.8.5.2.3. Category</h5></div></div></div><p>
Default behaviour for a newly-created flag is to appear on
products and all components, which is why <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">__Any__:__Any__</span>”</span>
is already entered in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Inclusions</span>”</span> box.
If this is not your desired behaviour, you must either set some
exclusions (for products on which you don't want the flag to appear),
or you must remove <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">__Any__:__Any__</span>”</span> from the Inclusions box
and define products/components specifically for this flag.
</p><p>
To create an Inclusion, select a Product from the top drop-down box.
You may also select a specific component from the bottom drop-down box.
(Setting <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">__Any__</span>”</span> for Product translates to,
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">all the products in this Bugzilla</span>”</span>.
Selecting <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">__Any__</span>”</span> in the Component field means
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">all components in the selected product.</span>”</span>)
Selections made, press <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Include</span>”</span>, and your
Product/Component pairing will show up in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Inclusions</span>”</span> box on the right.
</p><p>
To create an Exclusion, the process is the same; select a Product from the
top drop-down box, select a specific component if you want one, and press
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Exclude</span>”</span>. The Product/Component pairing will show up in the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Exclusions</span>”</span> box on the right.
</p><p>
This flag <span class="emphasis"><em>will</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>can</em></span> be set for any
products/components that appearing in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Inclusions</span>”</span> box
(or which fall under the appropriate <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">__Any__</span>”</span>).
This flag <span class="emphasis"><em>will not</em></span> appear (and therefore cannot be set) on
any products appearing in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Exclusions</span>”</span> box.
<span class="emphasis"><em> IMPORTANT: Exclusions override inclusions.</em></span>
</p><p>
You may select a Product without selecting a specific Component,
but you can't select a Component without a Product, or to select a
Component that does not belong to the named Product. If you do so,
Bugzilla will display an error message, even if all your products
have a component by that name.
</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Example:</em></span> Let's say you have a product called
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Jet Plane</span>”</span> that has thousands of components. You want
to be able to ask if a problem should be fixed in the next model of
plane you release. We'll call the flag <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">fixInNext</span>”</span>.
But, there's one component in <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Jet Plane,</span>”</span>
called <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Pilot.</span>”</span> It doesn't make sense to release a
new pilot, so you don't want to have the flag show up in that component.
So, you include <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Jet Plane:__Any__</span>”</span> and you exclude
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Jet Plane:Pilot</span>”</span>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-sortkey"></a>3.8.5.2.4. Sort Key</h5></div></div></div><p>
Flags normally show up in alphabetical order. If you want them to
show up in a different order, you can use this key set the order on each flag.
Flags with a lower sort key will appear before flags with a higher
sort key. Flags that have the same sort key will be sorted alphabetically,
but they will still be after flags with a lower sort key, and before flags
with a higher sort key.
</p><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Example:</em></span> I have AFlag (Sort Key 100), BFlag (Sort Key 10),
CFlag (Sort Key 10), and DFlag (Sort Key 1). These show up in
the order: DFlag, BFlag, CFlag, AFlag.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-active"></a>3.8.5.2.5. Active</h5></div></div></div><p>
Sometimes, you might want to keep old flag information in the
Bugzilla database, but stop users from setting any new flags of this type.
To do this, uncheck <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">active</span>”</span>. Deactivated
flags will still show up in the UI if they are ?, +, or -, but they
may only be cleared (unset), and cannot be changed to a new value.
Once a deactivated flag is cleared, it will completely disappear from a
bug/attachment, and cannot be set again.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-requestable"></a>3.8.5.2.6. Requestable</h5></div></div></div><p>
New flags are, by default, <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">requestable</span>”</span>, meaning that they
offer users the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">?</span>”</span> option, as well as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span>
and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>.
To remove the ? option, uncheck <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">requestable</span>”</span>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-specific"></a>3.8.5.2.7. Specifically Requestable</h5></div></div></div><p>
By default this box is checked for new flags, meaning that users may make
flag requests of specific individuals. Unchecking this box will remove the
text box next to a flag; if it is still requestable, then requests may
only be made <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">to the wind.</span>”</span> Removing this after specific
requests have been made will not remove those requests; that data will
stay in the database (though it will no longer appear to the user).
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-multiplicable"></a>3.8.5.2.8. Multiplicable</h5></div></div></div><p>
Any flag with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Multiplicable</span>”</span> set (default for new flags is 'on')
may be set more than once. After being set once, an unset flag
of the same type will appear below it with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">addl.</span>”</span> (short for
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">additional</span>”</span>) before the name. There is no limit to the number of
times a Multiplicable flags may be set on the same bug/attachment.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-field-cclist"></a>3.8.5.2.9. CC List</h5></div></div></div><p>
If you want certain users to be notified every time this flag is
set to ?, -, +, or unset, add them here. This is a comma-separated
list of email addresses that need not be restricted to Bugzilla usernames.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-grant-group"></a>3.8.5.2.10. Grant Group</h5></div></div></div><p>
When this field is set to some given group, only users in the group
can set the flag to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">+</span>”</span> and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>. This
field does not affect who can request or cancel the flag. For that,
see the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Request Group</span>”</span> field below. If this field
is left blank, all users can set or delete this flag. This field is
useful for restricting which users can approve or reject requests.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h5 class="title"><a name="flags-create-request-group"></a>3.8.5.2.11. Request Group</h5></div></div></div><p>
When this field is set to some given group, only users in the group
can request or cancel this flag. Note that this field has no effect
if the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">grant group</span>”</span> field is empty. You can set the
value of this field to a different group, but both fields have to be
set to a group for this field to have an effect.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="flags-delete"></a>3.8.5.3. Deleting a Flag</h4></div></div></div><p>
When you are at the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administer Flag Types</span>”</span> screen,
you will be presented with a list of Bug flags and a list of Attachment
Flags.
</p><p>
To delete a flag, click on the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Delete</span>”</span> link next to
the flag description.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Once you delete a flag, it is <span class="emphasis"><em>gone</em></span> from
your Bugzilla. All the data for that flag will be deleted.
Everywhere that flag was set, it will disappear,
and you cannot get that data back. If you want to keep flag data,
but don't want anybody to set any new flags or change current flags,
unset <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">active</span>”</span> in the flag Edit form.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="keywords"></a>3.9. Keywords</h2></div></div></div><p>
The administrator can define keywords which can be used to tag and
categorise bugs. For example, the keyword "regression" is commonly used.
A company might have a policy stating all regressions
must be fixed by the next release - this keyword can make tracking those
bugs much easier.
</p><p>
Keywords are global, rather than per-product. If the administrator changes
a keyword currently applied to any bugs, the keyword cache must be rebuilt
using the <a class="xref" href="#sanitycheck" title="3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity">Section 3.16, “Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity”</a> script. Currently keywords cannot
be marked obsolete to prevent future usage.
</p><p>
Keywords can be created, edited or deleted by clicking the "Keywords"
link in the admin page. There are two fields for each keyword - the keyword
itself and a brief description. Once created, keywords can be selected
and applied to individual bugs in that bug's "Details" section.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="custom-fields"></a>3.10. Custom Fields</h2></div></div></div><p>
The release of Bugzilla 3.0 added the ability to create Custom Fields.
Custom Fields are treated like any other field - they can be set in bugs
and used for search queries. Administrators should keep in mind that
adding too many fields can make the user interface more complicated and
harder to use. Custom Fields should be added only when necessary and with
careful consideration.
</p><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Before adding a Custom Field, make sure that Bugzilla cannot already
do the desired behavior. Many Bugzilla options are not enabled by
default, and many times Administrators find that simply enabling
certain options that already exist is sufficient.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Administrators can manage Custom Fields using the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Custom Fields</span>”</span> link on the Administration page. The Custom
Fields administration page displays a list of Custom Fields, if any exist,
and a link to "Add a new custom field".
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="add-custom-fields"></a>3.10.1. Adding Custom Fields</h3></div></div></div><p>
To add a new Custom Field, click the "Add a new custom field" link. This
page displays several options for the new field, described below.
</p><p>
The following attributes must be set for each new custom field:
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Name:</em></span>
The name of the field in the database, used internally. This name
MUST begin with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">cf_</span>”</span> to prevent confusion with
standard fields. If this string is omitted, it will
be automatically added to the name entered.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Description:</em></span>
A brief string which is used as the label for this Custom Field.
That is the string that users will see, and should be
short and explicit.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Type:</em></span>
The type of field to create. There are
several types available:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Bug ID:</span></dt><dd><p>
A field where you can enter the ID of another bug from
the same Bugzilla installation. To point to a bug in a remote
installation, use the See Also field instead.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Large Text Box:</span></dt><dd><p>
A multiple line box for entering free text.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Free Text:</span></dt><dd><p>
A single line box for entering free text.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Multiple-Selection Box:</span></dt><dd><p>
A list box where multiple options
can be selected. After creating this field, it must be edited
to add the selection options. See
<a class="xref" href="#edit-values-list" title="3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values">Section 3.11.1, “Viewing/Editing legal values”</a> for information about
editing legal values.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Drop Down:</span></dt><dd><p>
A list box where only one option can be selected.
After creating this field, it must be edited to add the
selection options. See
<a class="xref" href="#edit-values-list" title="3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values">Section 3.11.1, “Viewing/Editing legal values”</a> for information about
editing legal values.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Date/Time:</span></dt><dd><p>
A date field. This field appears with a
calendar widget for choosing the date.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Sortkey:</em></span>
Integer that determines in which order Custom Fields are
displayed in the User Interface, especially when viewing a bug.
Fields with lower values are displayed first.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Reverse Relationship Description:</em></span>
When the custom field is of type <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Bug ID</span>”</span>, you can
enter text here which will be used as label in the referenced
bug to list bugs which point to it. This gives you the ability
to have a mutual relationship between two bugs.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Can be set on bug creation:</em></span>
Boolean that determines whether this field can be set on
bug creation. If not selected, then a bug must be created
before this field can be set. See <a class="xref" href="#bugreports" title="5.6. Filing Bugs">Section 5.6, “Filing Bugs”</a>
for information about filing bugs.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Displayed in bugmail for new bugs:</em></span>
Boolean that determines whether the value set on this field
should appear in bugmail when the bug is filed. This attribute
has no effect if the field cannot be set on bug creation.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Is obsolete:</em></span>
Boolean that determines whether this field should
be displayed at all. Obsolete Custom Fields are hidden.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Is mandatory:</em></span>
Boolean that determines whether this field must be set.
For single and multi-select fields, this means that a (non-default)
value must be selected, and for text and date fields, some text
must be entered.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Field only appears when:</em></span>
A custom field can be made visible when some criteria is met.
For instance, when the bug belongs to one or more products,
or when the bug is of some given severity. If left empty, then
the custom field will always be visible, in all bugs.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Field that controls the values that appear in this field:</em></span>
When the custom field is of type <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Drop Down</span>”</span> or
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Multiple-Selection Box</span>”</span>, you can restrict the
availability of the values of the custom field based on the
value of another field. This criteria is independent of the
criteria used in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Field only appears when</span>”</span>
setting. For instance, you may decide that some given value
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">valueY</span>”</span> is only available when the bug status
is RESOLVED while the value <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">valueX</span>”</span> should
always be listed.
Once you have selected the field which should control the
availability of the values of this custom field, you can
edit values of this custom field to set the criteria, see
<a class="xref" href="#edit-values-list" title="3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values">Section 3.11.1, “Viewing/Editing legal values”</a>.
</p></li></ul></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="edit-custom-fields"></a>3.10.2. Editing Custom Fields</h3></div></div></div><p>
As soon as a Custom Field is created, its name and type cannot be
changed. If this field is a drop down menu, its legal values can
be set as described in <a class="xref" href="#edit-values-list" title="3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values">Section 3.11.1, “Viewing/Editing legal values”</a>. All
other attributes can be edited as described above.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="delete-custom-fields"></a>3.10.3. Deleting Custom Fields</h3></div></div></div><p>
Only custom fields which are marked as obsolete, and which never
have been used, can be deleted completely (else the integrity
of the bug history would be compromised). For custom fields marked
as obsolete, a "Delete" link will appear in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Action</span>”</span>
column. If the custom field has been used in the past, the deletion
will be rejected. But marking the field as obsolete is sufficient
to hide it from the user interface entirely.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="edit-values"></a>3.11. Legal Values</h2></div></div></div><p>
Legal values for the operating system, platform, bug priority and
severity, custom fields of type <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Drop Down</span>”</span> and
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Multiple-Selection Box</span>”</span> (see <a class="xref" href="#custom-fields" title="3.10. Custom Fields">Section 3.10, “Custom Fields”</a>),
as well as the list of valid bug statuses and resolutions can be
customized from the same interface. You can add, edit, disable and
remove values which can be used with these fields.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="edit-values-list"></a>3.11.1. Viewing/Editing legal values</h3></div></div></div><p>
Editing legal values requires <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">admin</span>”</span> privileges.
Select "Field Values" from the Administration page. A list of all
fields, both system fields and Custom Fields, for which legal values
can be edited appears. Click a field name to edit its legal values.
</p><p>
There is no limit to how many values a field can have, but each value
must be unique to that field. The sortkey is important to display these
values in the desired order.
</p><p>
When the availability of the values of a custom field is controlled
by another field, you can select from here which value of the other field
must be set for the value of the custom field to appear.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="edit-values-delete"></a>3.11.2. Deleting legal values</h3></div></div></div><p>
Legal values from Custom Fields can be deleted, but only if the
following two conditions are respected:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>The value is not used by default for the field.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>No bug is currently using this value.</p></li></ol></div><p>
If any of these conditions is not respected, the value cannot be deleted.
The only way to delete these values is to reassign bugs to another value
and to set another value as default for the field.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="bug_status_workflow"></a>3.12. Bug Status Workflow</h2></div></div></div><p>
The bug status workflow is no longer hardcoded but can be freely customized
from the web interface. Only one bug status cannot be renamed nor deleted,
UNCONFIRMED, but the workflow involving it is free. The configuration
page displays all existing bug statuses twice, first on the left for bug
statuses we come from and on the top for bug statuses we move to.
If the checkbox is checked, then the transition between the two bug statuses
is legal, else it's forbidden independently of your privileges. The bug status
used for the "duplicate_or_move_bug_status" parameter must be part of the
workflow as that is the bug status which will be used when duplicating or
moving a bug, so it must be available from each bug status.
</p><p>
When the workflow is set, the "View Current Triggers" link below the table
lets you set which transitions require a comment from the user.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="voting"></a>3.13. Voting</h2></div></div></div><p>All of the code for voting in Bugzilla has been moved into an
extension, called "Voting", in the <code class="filename">extensions/Voting/</code>
directory. To enable it, you must remove the <code class="filename">disabled</code>
file from that directory, and run <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>.</p><p>Voting allows users to be given a pot of votes which they can allocate
to bugs, to indicate that they'd like them fixed.
This allows developers to gauge
user need for a particular enhancement or bugfix. By allowing bugs with
a certain number of votes to automatically move from "UNCONFIRMED" to
"CONFIRMED", users of the bug system can help high-priority bugs garner
attention so they don't sit for a long time awaiting triage.</p><p>To modify Voting settings:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Navigate to the "Edit product" screen for the Product you
wish to modify</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Maximum Votes per person</em></span>:
Setting this field to "0" disables voting.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Maximum Votes a person can put on a single
bug</em></span>:
It should probably be some number lower than the
"Maximum votes per person". Don't set this field to "0" if
"Maximum votes per person" is non-zero; that doesn't make
any sense.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Number of votes a bug in this product needs to
automatically get out of the UNCONFIRMED state</em></span>:
Setting this field to "0" disables the automatic move of
bugs from UNCONFIRMED to CONFIRMED.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Once you have adjusted the values to your preference, click
"Update".</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="quips"></a>3.14. Quips</h2></div></div></div><p>
Quips are small text messages that can be configured to appear
next to search results. A Bugzilla installation can have its own specific
quips. Whenever a quip needs to be displayed, a random selection
is made from the pool of already existing quips.
</p><p>
Quip submission is controlled by the <span class="emphasis"><em>quip_list_entry_control</em></span>
parameter. It has several possible values: open, moderated, or closed.
In order to enable quips approval you need to set this parameter to
"moderated". In this way, users are free to submit quips for addition
but an administrator must explicitly approve them before they are
actually used.
</p><p>
In order to see the user interface for the quips, it is enough to click
on a quip when it is displayed together with the search results. Or
it can be seen directly in the browser by visiting the quips.cgi URL
(prefixed with the usual web location of the Bugzilla installation).
Once the quip interface is displayed, it is enough to click the
"view and edit the whole quip list" in order to see the administration
page. A page with all the quips available in the database will
be displayed.
</p><p>
Next to each quip there is a checkbox, under the
"Approved" column. Quips who have this checkbox checked are
already approved and will appear next to the search results.
The ones that have it unchecked are still preserved in the
database but they will not appear on search results pages.
User submitted quips have initially the checkbox unchecked.
</p><p>
Also, there is a delete link next to each quip,
which can be used in order to permanently delete a quip.
</p><p>
Display of quips is controlled by the <span class="emphasis"><em>display_quips</em></span>
user preference. Possible values are "on" and "off".
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="groups"></a>3.15. Groups and Group Security</h2></div></div></div><p>
Groups allow for separating bugs into logical divisions.
Groups are typically used
to isolate bugs that should only be seen by certain people. For
example, a company might create a different group for each one of its customers
or partners. Group permissions could be set so that each partner or customer would
only have access to their own bugs. Or, groups might be used to create
variable access controls for different departments within an organization.
Another common use of groups is to associate groups with products,
creating isolation and access control on a per-product basis.
</p><p>
Groups and group behaviors are controlled in several places:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
The group configuration page. To view or edit existing groups, or to
create new groups, access the "Groups" link from the "Administration"
page. This section of the manual deals primarily with the aspect of
group controls accessed on this page.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Global configuration parameters. Bugzilla has several parameters
that control the overall default group behavior and restriction
levels. For more information on the parameters that control
group behavior globally, see <a class="xref" href="#param-group-security" title="3.1.9. Group Security">Section 3.1.9, “Group Security”</a>.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Product association with groups. Most of the functionality of groups
and group security is controlled at the product level. Some aspects
of group access controls for products are discussed in this section,
but for more detail see <a class="xref" href="#product-group-controls" title="3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products">Section 3.4.4, “Assigning Group Controls to Products”</a>.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Group access for users. See <a class="xref" href="#users-and-groups" title="3.15.3. Assigning Users to Groups">Section 3.15.3, “Assigning Users to Groups”</a> for
details on how users are assigned group access.
</p></li></ol></div><p>
Group permissions are such that if a bug belongs to a group, only members
of that group can see the bug. If a bug is in more than one group, only
members of <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> the groups that the bug is in can see
the bug. For information on granting read-only access to certain people and
full edit access to others, see <a class="xref" href="#product-group-controls" title="3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products">Section 3.4.4, “Assigning Group Controls to Products”</a>.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
By default, bugs can also be seen by the Assignee, the Reporter, and
by everyone on the CC List, regardless of whether or not the bug would
typically be viewable by them. Visibility to the Reporter and CC List can
be overridden (on a per-bug basis) by bringing up the bug, finding the
section that starts with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Users in the roles selected below...</span>”</span>
and un-checking the box next to either 'Reporter' or 'CC List' (or both).
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="create-groups"></a>3.15.1. Creating Groups</h3></div></div></div><p>
To create a new group, follow the steps below:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
Select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administration</span>”</span> link in the page footer,
and then select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Groups</span>”</span> link from the
Administration page.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
A table of all the existing groups is displayed. Below the table is a
description of all the fields. To create a new group, select the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Add Group</span>”</span> link under the table of existing groups.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
There are five fields to fill out. These fields are documented below
the form. Choose a name and description for the group. Decide whether
this group should be used for bugs (in all likelihood this should be
selected). Optionally, choose a regular expression that will
automatically add any matching users to the group, and choose an
icon that will help identify user comments for the group. The regular
expression can be useful, for example, to automatically put all users
from the same company into one group (if the group is for a specific
customer or partner).
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">User RegExp</span>”</span> is filled out, users whose email
addresses match the regular expression will automatically be
members of the group as long as their email addresses continue
to match the regular expression. If their email address changes
and no longer matches the regular expression, they will be removed
from the group. Versions 2.16 and older of Bugzilla did not automatically
remove users who's email addresses no longer matched the RegExp.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If specifying a domain in the regular expression, end
the regexp with a "$". Otherwise, when granting access to
"@mycompany\.com", access will also be granted to
'badperson@mycompany.com.cracker.net'. Use the syntax,
'@mycompany\.com$' for the regular expression.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
After the new group is created, it can be edited for additional options.
The "Edit Group" page allows for specifying other groups that should be included
in this group and which groups should be permitted to add and delete
users from this group. For more details, see <a class="xref" href="#edit-groups" title="3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions">Section 3.15.2, “Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions”</a>.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="edit-groups"></a>3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions</h3></div></div></div><p>
To access the "Edit Groups" page, select the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administration</span>”</span> link in the page footer,
and then select the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Groups</span>”</span> link from the Administration page.
A table of all the existing groups is displayed. Click on a group name
you wish to edit or control permissions for.
</p><p>
The "Edit Groups" page contains the same five fields present when
creating a new group. Below that are two additional sections, "Group
Permissions," and "Mass Remove". The "Mass Remove" option simply removes
all users from the group who match the regular expression entered. The
"Group Permissions" section requires further explanation.
</p><p>
The "Group Permissions" section on the "Edit Groups" page contains four sets
of permissions that control the relationship of this group to other
groups. If the 'usevisibilitygroups' parameter is in use (see
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a>) two additional sets of permissions are displayed.
Each set consists of two select boxes. On the left, a select box
with a list of all existing groups. On the right, a select box listing
all groups currently selected for this permission setting (this box will
be empty for new groups). The way these controls allow groups to relate
to one another is called <span class="emphasis"><em>inheritance</em></span>.
Each of the six permissions is described below.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That Are a Member of This Group</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
Members of any groups selected here will automatically have
membership in this group. In other words, members of any selected
group will inherit membership in this group.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That This Group Is a Member Of</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
Members of this group will inherit membership to any group
selected here. For example, suppose the group being edited is
an Admin group. If there are two products (Product1 and Product2)
and each product has its
own group (Group1 and Group2), and the Admin group
should have access to both products,
simply select both Group1 and Group2 here.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That Can Grant Membership in This Group</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
The members of any group selected here will be able add users
to this group, even if they themselves are not in this group.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That This Group Can Grant Membership In</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
Members of this group can add users to any group selected here,
even if they themselves are not in the selected groups.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That Can See This Group</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
Members of any selected group can see the users in this group.
This setting is only visible if the 'usevisibilitygroups' parameter
is enabled on the Bugzilla Configuration page. See
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a> for information on configuring Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
<span class="emphasis"><em>Groups That This Group Can See</em></span>
</span></dt><dd><p>
Members of this group can see members in any of the selected groups.
This setting is only visible if the 'usevisibilitygroups' parameter
is enabled on the the Bugzilla Configuration page. See
<a class="xref" href="#parameters" title="3.1. Bugzilla Configuration">Section 3.1, “Bugzilla Configuration”</a> for information on configuring Bugzilla.
</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="users-and-groups"></a>3.15.3. Assigning Users to Groups</h3></div></div></div><p>
A User can become a member of a group in several ways:
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
The user can be explicitly placed in the group by editing
the user's profile. This can be done by accessing the "Users" page
from the "Administration" page. Use the search form to find the user
you want to edit group membership for, and click on their email
address in the search results to edit their profile. The profile
page lists all the groups, and indicates if the user is a member of
the group either directly or indirectly. More information on indirect
group membership is below. For more details on User administration,
see <a class="xref" href="#useradmin" title="3.2. User Administration">Section 3.2, “User Administration”</a>.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
The group can include another group of which the user is
a member. This is indicated by square brackets around the checkbox
next to the group name in the user's profile.
See <a class="xref" href="#edit-groups" title="3.15.2. Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions">Section 3.15.2, “Editing Groups and Assigning Group Permissions”</a> for details on group inheritance.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
The user's email address can match the regular expression
that has been specified to automatically grant membership to
the group. This is indicated by "*" around the check box by the
group name in the user's profile.
See <a class="xref" href="#create-groups" title="3.15.1. Creating Groups">Section 3.15.1, “Creating Groups”</a> for details on
the regular expression option when creating groups.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354648300480"></a>3.15.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products</h3></div></div></div><p>
The primary functionality of groups is derived from the relationship of
groups to products. The concepts around segregating access to bugs with
product group controls can be confusing. For details and examples on this
topic, see <a class="xref" href="#product-group-controls" title="3.4.4. Assigning Group Controls to Products">Section 3.4.4, “Assigning Group Controls to Products”</a>.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="sanitycheck"></a>3.16. Checking and Maintaining Database Integrity</h2></div></div></div><p>
Over time it is possible for the Bugzilla database to become corrupt
or to have anomalies.
This could happen through normal usage of Bugzilla, manual database
administration outside of the Bugzilla user interface, or from some
other unexpected event. Bugzilla includes a "Sanity Check" script that
can perform several basic database checks, and repair certain problems or
inconsistencies.
</p><p>
To run the "Sanity Check" script, log in as an Administrator and click the
"Sanity Check" link in the admin page. Any problems that are found will be
displayed in red letters. If the script is capable of fixing a problem,
it will present a link to initiate the fix. If the script cannot
fix the problem it will require manual database administration or recovery.
</p><p>
The "Sanity Check" script can also be run from the command line via the perl
script <code class="filename">sanitycheck.pl</code>. The script can also be run as
a <span class="command"><strong>cron</strong></span> job. Results will be delivered by email.
</p><p>
The "Sanity Check" script should be run on a regular basis as a matter of
best practice.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The "Sanity Check" script is no substitute for a competent database
administrator. It is only designed to check and repair basic database
problems.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="security"></a>Chapter 4. Bugzilla Security</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os">4.1. Operating System</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-ports">4.1.1. TCP/IP Ports</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-accounts">4.1.2. System User Accounts</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-os-chroot">4.1.3. The <code class="filename">chroot</code> Jail</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-webserver">4.2. Web server</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-webserver-access">4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-bugzilla">4.3. Bugzilla</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#security-bugzilla-charset">4.3.1. Prevent users injecting malicious Javascript</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div><p>While some of the items in this chapter are related to the operating
system Bugzilla is running on or some of the support software required to
run Bugzilla, it is all related to protecting your data. This is not
intended to be a comprehensive guide to securing Linux, Apache, MySQL, or
any other piece of software mentioned. There is no substitute for active
administration and monitoring of a machine. The key to good security is
actually right in the middle of the word: <span class="emphasis"><em>U R It</em></span>.
</p><p>While programmers in general always strive to write secure code,
accidents can and do happen. The best approach to security is to always
assume that the program you are working with isn't 100% secure and restrict
its access to other parts of your machine as much as possible.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="security-os"></a>4.1. Operating System</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="security-os-ports"></a>4.1.1. TCP/IP Ports</h3></div></div></div><p>The TCP/IP standard defines more than 65,000 ports for sending
and receiving traffic. Of those, Bugzilla needs exactly one to operate
(different configurations and options may require up to 3). You should
audit your server and make sure that you aren't listening on any ports
you don't need to be. It's also highly recommended that the server
Bugzilla resides on, along with any other machines you administer, be
placed behind some kind of firewall.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="security-os-accounts"></a>4.1.2. System User Accounts</h3></div></div></div><p>Many <a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-daemon"><em class="glossterm">daemons</em></a>, such
as Apache's <code class="filename">httpd</code> or MySQL's
<code class="filename">mysqld</code>, run as either <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">root</span>”</span> or
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">nobody</span>”</span>. This is even worse on Windows machines where the
majority of <a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-service"><em class="glossterm">services</em></a>
run as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">SYSTEM</span>”</span>. While running as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">root</span>”</span> or
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">SYSTEM</span>”</span> introduces obvious security concerns, the
problems introduced by running everything as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">nobody</span>”</span> may
not be so obvious. Basically, if you run every daemon as
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">nobody</span>”</span> and one of them gets compromised it can
compromise every other daemon running as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">nobody</span>”</span> on your
machine. For this reason, it is recommended that you create a user
account for each daemon.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>You will need to set the <code class="option">webservergroup</code> option
in <code class="filename">localconfig</code> to the group your web server runs
as. This will allow <code class="filename">./checksetup.pl</code> to set file
permissions on Unix systems so that nothing is world-writable.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="security-os-chroot"></a>4.1.3. The <code class="filename">chroot</code> Jail</h3></div></div></div><p>
If your system supports it, you may wish to consider running
Bugzilla inside of a <code class="filename">chroot</code> jail. This option
provides unprecedented security by restricting anything running
inside the jail from accessing any information outside of it. If you
wish to use this option, please consult the documentation that came
with your system.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="security-webserver"></a>4.2. Web server</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="security-webserver-access"></a>4.2.1. Disabling Remote Access to Bugzilla Configuration Files</h3></div></div></div><p>
There are many files that are placed in the Bugzilla directory
area that should not be accessible from the web server. Because of the way
Bugzilla is currently layed out, the list of what should and should not
be accessible is rather complicated. A quick way is to run
<code class="filename">testserver.pl</code> to check if your web server serves
Bugzilla files as expected. If not, you may want to follow the few
steps below.
</p><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Bugzilla ships with the ability to create
<a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-htaccess"><em class="glossterm"><code class="filename">.htaccess</code></em></a>
files that enforce these rules. Instructions for enabling these
directives in Apache can be found in <a class="xref" href="#http-apache" title="2.2.4.1. Bugzilla using Apache">Section 2.2.4.1, “Bugzilla using Apache”</a>
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>In the main Bugzilla directory, you should:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: circle; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block:
<span class="simplelist"><code class="filename">*.pl</code>, <code class="filename">*localconfig*</code></span>
</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>In <code class="filename">data</code>:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: circle; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>In <code class="filename">data/webdot</code>:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: circle; "><li class="listitem"><p>If you use a remote webdot server:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: square; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>But allow
<span class="simplelist"><code class="filename">*.dot</code></span>
only for the remote webdot server</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>Otherwise, if you use a local GraphViz:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: square; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>But allow:
<span class="simplelist"><code class="filename">*.png</code>, <code class="filename">*.gif</code>, <code class="filename">*.jpg</code>, <code class="filename">*.map</code></span>
</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>And if you don't use any dot:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: square; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li></ul></div></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>In <code class="filename">Bugzilla</code>:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: circle; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>In <code class="filename">template</code>:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: circle; "><li class="listitem"><p>Block everything</p></li></ul></div></li></ul></div><p>Be sure to test that data that should not be accessed remotely is
properly blocked. Of particular interest is the localconfig file which
contains your database password. Also, be aware that many editors
create temporary and backup files in the working directory and that
those should also not be accessible. For more information, see
<a class="ulink" href="http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/show_bug.cgi?id=186383" target="_top">bug 186383</a>
or
<a class="ulink" href="http://online.securityfocus.com/bid/6501" target="_top">Bugtraq ID 6501</a>.
To test, simply run <code class="filename">testserver.pl</code>, as said above.
</p><div class="tip" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Tip"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Tip]" src="../images/tip.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Be sure to check <a class="xref" href="#http" title="2.2.4. Web server">Section 2.2.4, “Web server”</a> for instructions
specific to the web server you use.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="security-bugzilla"></a>4.3. Bugzilla</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="security-bugzilla-charset"></a>4.3.1. Prevent users injecting malicious Javascript</h3></div></div></div><p>If you installed Bugzilla version 2.22 or later from scratch,
then the <span class="emphasis"><em>utf8</em></span> parameter is switched on by default.
This makes Bugzilla explicitly set the character encoding, following
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.cert.org/tech_tips/malicious_code_mitigation.html#3" target="_top">a
CERT advisory</a> recommending exactly this.
The following therefore does not apply to you; just keep
<span class="emphasis"><em>utf8</em></span> turned on.
</p><p>If you've upgraded from an older version, then it may be possible
for a Bugzilla user to take advantage of character set encoding
ambiguities to inject HTML into Bugzilla comments.
This could include malicious scripts.
This is because due to internationalization concerns, we are unable to
turn the <span class="emphasis"><em>utf8</em></span> parameter on by default for upgraded
installations.
Turning it on manually will prevent this problem.
</p></div></div></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="using"></a>Chapter 5. Using Bugzilla</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#using-intro">5.1. Introduction</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#myaccount">5.2. Create a Bugzilla Account</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bug_page">5.3. Anatomy of a Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#lifecycle">5.4. Life Cycle of a Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#query">5.5. Searching for Bugs</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#boolean">5.5.1. Boolean Charts</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#quicksearch">5.5.2. Quicksearch</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#casesensitivity">5.5.3. Case Sensitivity in Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#list">5.5.4. Bug Lists</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#individual-buglists">5.5.5. Adding/removing tags to/from bugs</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#bugreports">5.6. Filing Bugs</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#fillingbugs">5.6.1. Reporting a New Bug</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cloningbugs">5.6.2. Clone an Existing Bug</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#attachments">5.7. Attachments</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#patchviewer">5.7.1. Patch Viewer</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#hintsandtips">5.8. Hints and Tips</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354649509344">5.8.1. Autolinkification</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#commenting">5.8.2. Comments</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#comment-wrapping">5.8.3. Server-Side Comment Wrapping</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#dependencytree">5.8.4. Dependency Tree</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#timetracking">5.9. Time Tracking Information</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#userpreferences">5.10. User Preferences</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#generalpreferences">5.10.1. General Preferences</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#emailpreferences">5.10.2. Email Preferences</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#savedsearches">5.10.3. Saved Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#accountpreferences">5.10.4. Name and Password</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#permissionsettings">5.10.5. Permissions</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#reporting">5.11. Reports and Charts</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#reports">5.11.1. Reports</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#charts">5.11.2. Charts</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#flags">5.12. Flags</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining">5.13. Whining</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-overview">5.13.1. The Event</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-schedule">5.13.2. Whining Schedule</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#whining-query">5.13.3. Whining Searches</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#idm140354648282208">5.13.4. Saving Your Changes</a></span></dt></dl></dd></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="using-intro"></a>5.1. Introduction</h2></div></div></div><p>This section contains information for end-users of Bugzilla. There
is a Bugzilla test installation, called
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/" target="_top">Landfill</a>, which you are
welcome to play with (if it's up). However, not all of the Bugzilla
installations there will necessarily have all Bugzilla features enabled,
and different installations run different versions, so some things may not
quite work as this document describes.</p><p>
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) are available and answered on
<a class="ulink" href="http://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:FAQ" target="_top">wiki.mozilla.org</a>.
They may cover some questions you have which are left unanswered.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="myaccount"></a>5.2. Create a Bugzilla Account</h2></div></div></div><p>If you want to use Bugzilla, first you need to create an account.
Consult with the administrator responsible for your installation of
Bugzilla for the URL you should use to access it. If you're
test-driving Bugzilla, use this URL:
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/" target="_top">http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/</a>.
</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
On the home page <code class="filename">index.cgi</code>, click the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Open a new Bugzilla account</span>”</span> link, or the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">New Account</span>”</span> link available in the footer of pages.
Now enter your email address, then click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Send</span>”</span>
button.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If none of these links is available, this means that the
administrator of the installation has disabled self-registration.
This means that only an administrator can create accounts
for other users. One reason could be that this installation is
private.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Also, if only some users are allowed to create an account on
the installation, you may see these links but your registration
may fail if your email address doesn't match the ones accepted
by the installation. This is another way to restrict who can
access and edit bugs in this installation.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Within moments, and if your registration is accepted, you should
receive an email to the address you provided, which contains your
login name (generally the same as the email address), and two URLs
with a token (a random string generated by the installation) to
confirm, respectively cancel, your registration. This is a way to
prevent users from abusing the generation of user accounts, for
instance by entering inexistent email addresses, or email addresses
which do not belong to them.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
By default, you have 3 days to confirm your registration. Past this
timeframe, the token is invalidated and the registration is
automatically canceled. You can also cancel this registration sooner
by using the appropriate URL in the email you got.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
If you confirm your registration, Bugzilla will ask you your real name
(optional, but recommended) and your password, which must be between
3 and 16 characters long.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Now all you need to do is to click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Log In</span>”</span>
link in the footer at the bottom of the page in your browser,
enter your email address and password you just chose into the
login form, and click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Log in</span>”</span> button.
</p></li></ol></div><p>
You are now logged in. Bugzilla uses cookies to remember you are
logged in so, unless you have cookies disabled or your IP address changes,
you should not have to log in again during your session.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="bug_page"></a>5.3. Anatomy of a Bug</h2></div></div></div><p>The core of Bugzilla is the screen which displays a particular
bug. It's a good place to explain some Bugzilla concepts.
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/show_bug.cgi?id=1" target="_top">
Bug 1 on Landfill</a>
is a good example. Note that the labels for most fields are hyperlinks;
clicking them will take you to context-sensitive help on that
particular field. Fields marked * may not be present on every
installation of Bugzilla.</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Product and Component</em></span>:
Bugs are divided up by Product and Component, with a Product
having one or more Components in it. For example,
bugzilla.mozilla.org's "Bugzilla" Product is composed of several
Components:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Administration:</span></dt><dd><p>
Administration of a Bugzilla installation.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Bugzilla-General:</span></dt><dd><p>
Anything that doesn't fit in the other components, or spans
multiple components.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Creating/Changing Bugs:</span></dt><dd><p>
Creating, changing, and viewing bugs.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Documentation:</span></dt><dd><p>
The Bugzilla documentation, including The Bugzilla Guide.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Email:</span></dt><dd><p>
Anything to do with email sent by Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Installation:</span></dt><dd><p>
The installation process of Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Query/Buglist:</span></dt><dd><p>
Anything to do with searching for bugs and viewing the
buglists.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Reporting/Charting:</span></dt><dd><p>
Getting reports from Bugzilla.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">User Accounts:</span></dt><dd><p>
Anything about managing a user account from the user's perspective.
Saved queries, creating accounts, changing passwords, logging in,
etc.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">User Interface:</span></dt><dd><p>
General issues having to do with the user interface cosmetics (not
functionality) including cosmetic issues, HTML templates,
etc.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Status and Resolution:</em></span>
These define exactly what state the bug is in - from not even
being confirmed as a bug, through to being fixed and the fix
confirmed by Quality Assurance. The different possible values for
Status and Resolution on your installation should be documented in the
context-sensitive help for those items.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Assigned To:</em></span>
The person responsible for fixing the bug.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*QA Contact:</em></span>
The person responsible for quality assurance on this bug.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*URL:</em></span>
A URL associated with the bug, if any.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Summary:</em></span>
A one-sentence summary of the problem.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Status Whiteboard:</em></span>
(a.k.a. Whiteboard) A free-form text area for adding short notes
and tags to a bug.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Keywords:</em></span>
The administrator can define keywords which you can use to tag and
categorise bugs - e.g. The Mozilla Project has keywords like crash
and regression.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Platform and OS:</em></span>
These indicate the computing environment where the bug was
found.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Version:</em></span>
The "Version" field is usually used for versions of a product which
have been released, and is set to indicate which versions of a
Component have the particular problem the bug report is
about.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Priority:</em></span>
The bug assignee uses this field to prioritize his or her bugs.
It's a good idea not to change this on other people's bugs.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Severity:</em></span>
This indicates how severe the problem is - from blocker
("application unusable") to trivial ("minor cosmetic issue"). You
can also use this field to indicate whether a bug is an enhancement
request.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Target:</em></span>
(a.k.a. Target Milestone) A future version by which the bug is to
be fixed. e.g. The Bugzilla Project's milestones for future
Bugzilla versions are 2.18, 2.20, 3.0, etc. Milestones are not
restricted to numbers, thought - you can use any text strings, such
as dates.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Reporter:</em></span>
The person who filed the bug.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>CC list:</em></span>
A list of people who get mail when the bug changes.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Time Tracking:</em></span>
This form can be used for time tracking.
To use this feature, you have to be blessed group membership
specified by the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">timetrackinggroup</span>”</span> parameter.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Orig. Est.:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the original estimated time.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Current Est.:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the current estimated time.
This number is calculated from <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Hours Worked</span>”</span>
and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Hours Left</span>”</span>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Hours Worked:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the number of hours worked.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Hours Left:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Current Est.</span>”</span> -
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Hours Worked</span>”</span>.
This value + <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Hours Worked</span>”</span> will become the
new Current Est.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%Complete:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows what percentage of the task is complete.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Gain:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the number of hours that the bug is ahead of the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Orig. Est.</span>”</span>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Deadline:</span></dt><dd><p>
This field shows the deadline for this bug.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Attachments:</em></span>
You can attach files (e.g. testcases or patches) to bugs. If there
are any attachments, they are listed in this section.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Dependencies:</em></span>
If this bug cannot be fixed unless other bugs are fixed (depends
on), or this bug stops other bugs being fixed (blocks), their
numbers are recorded here.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>*Votes:</em></span>
Whether this bug has any votes.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Additional Comments:</em></span>
You can add your two cents to the bug discussion here, if you have
something worthwhile to say.</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="lifecycle"></a>5.4. Life Cycle of a Bug</h2></div></div></div><p>
The life cycle of a bug, also known as workflow, is customizable to match
the needs of your organization, see <a class="xref" href="#bug_status_workflow" title="3.12. Bug Status Workflow">Section 3.12, “Bug Status Workflow”</a>.
<a class="xref" href="#lifecycle-image" title="Figure 5.1. Lifecycle of a Bugzilla Bug">Figure 5.1, “Lifecycle of a Bugzilla Bug”</a> contains a graphical representation of
the default workflow using the default bug statuses. If you wish to
customize this image for your site, the
<a class="ulink" href="../images/bzLifecycle.xml" target="_top">diagram file</a>
is available in <a class="ulink" href="http://www.gnome.org/projects/dia" target="_top">Dia's</a>
native XML format.
</p><div class="figure"><a name="lifecycle-image"></a><p class="title"><b>Figure 5.1. Lifecycle of a Bugzilla Bug</b></p><div class="figure-contents"><div class="mediaobject"><img src="../images/bzLifecycle.png" alt="Lifecycle of a Bugzilla Bug"></div></div></div><br class="figure-break"></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="query"></a>5.5. Searching for Bugs</h2></div></div></div><p>The Bugzilla Search page is the interface where you can find
any bug report, comment, or patch currently in the Bugzilla system. You
can play with it here:
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/query.cgi" target="_top">http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/query.cgi</a>.</p><p>The Search page has controls for selecting different possible
values for all of the fields in a bug, as described above. For some
fields, multiple values can be selected. In those cases, Bugzilla
returns bugs where the content of the field matches any one of the selected
values. If none is selected, then the field can take any value.</p><p>
After a search is run, you can save it as a Saved Search, which
will appear in the page footer. If you are in the group defined
by the "querysharegroup" parameter, you may share your queries
with other users, see <a class="xref" href="#savedsearches" title="5.10.3. Saved Searches">Saved Searches</a> for more details.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="boolean"></a>5.5.1. Boolean Charts</h3></div></div></div><p>
Highly advanced querying is done using Boolean Charts.
</p><p>
The boolean charts further restrict the set of results
returned by a query. It is possible to search for bugs
based on elaborate combinations of criteria.
</p><p>
The simplest boolean searches have only one term. These searches
permit the selected left <span class="emphasis"><em>field</em></span>
to be compared using a
selectable <span class="emphasis"><em>operator</em></span> to a
specified <span class="emphasis"><em>value.</em></span>
Using the "And," "Or," and "Add Another Boolean Chart" buttons,
additional terms can be included in the query, further
altering the list of bugs returned by the query.
</p><p>
There are three fields in each row of a boolean search.
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Field:</em></span>
the items being searched
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Operator:</em></span>
the comparison operator
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Value:</em></span>
the value to which the field is being compared
</p></li></ul></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="pronouns"></a>5.5.1.1. Pronoun Substitution</h4></div></div></div><p>
Sometimes, a query needs to compare a user-related field
(such as ReportedBy) with a role-specific user (such as the
user running the query or the user to whom each bug is assigned).
When the operator is either "is equal to" or "is not equal to", the value
can be "%reporter%", "%assignee%", "%qacontact%", or "%user%".
The user pronoun
refers to the user who is executing the query or, in the case
of whining reports, the user who will be the recipient
of the report. The reporter, assignee, and qacontact
pronouns refer to the corresponding fields in the bug.
</p><p>
Boolean charts also let you type a group name in any user-related
field if the operator is either "is equal to", "is not equal to" or
"contains the string (exact case)". This will let you query for
any member belonging (or not) to the specified group. The group name
must be entered following the "%group.foo%" syntax, where "foo" is
the group name. So if you are looking for bugs reported by any user
being in the "editbugs" group, then you can type "%group.editbugs%".
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="negation"></a>5.5.1.2. Negation</h4></div></div></div><p>
At first glance, negation seems redundant. Rather than
searching for
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
NOT("summary" "contains the string" "foo"),
</p></blockquote></div><p>
one could search for
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
("summary" "does not contain the string" "foo").
</p></blockquote></div><p>
However, the search
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
("CC" "does not contain the string" "@mozilla.org")
</p></blockquote></div><p>
would find every bug where anyone on the CC list did not contain
"@mozilla.org" while
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
NOT("CC" "contains the string" "@mozilla.org")
</p></blockquote></div><p>
would find every bug where there was nobody on the CC list who
did contain the string. Similarly, the use of negation also permits
complex expressions to be built using terms OR'd together and then
negated. Negation permits queries such as
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
NOT(("product" "is equal to" "update") OR
("component" "is equal to" "Documentation"))
</p></blockquote></div><p>
to find bugs that are neither
in the update product or in the documentation component or
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
NOT(("commenter" "is equal to" "%assignee%") OR
("component" "is equal to" "Documentation"))
</p></blockquote></div><p>
to find non-documentation
bugs on which the assignee has never commented.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="multiplecharts"></a>5.5.1.3. Multiple Charts</h4></div></div></div><p>
The terms within a single row of a boolean chart are all
constraints on a single piece of data. If you are looking for
a bug that has two different people cc'd on it, then you need
to use two boolean charts. A search for
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
("cc" "contains the string" "foo@") AND
("cc" "contains the string" "@mozilla.org")
</p></blockquote></div><p>
would return only bugs with "foo@mozilla.org" on the cc list.
If you wanted bugs where there is someone on the cc list
containing "foo@" and someone else containing "@mozilla.org",
then you would need two boolean charts.
</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>
First chart: ("cc" "contains the string" "foo@")
</p><p>
Second chart: ("cc" "contains the string" "@mozilla.org")
</p></blockquote></div><p>
The bugs listed will be only the bugs where ALL the charts are true.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="quicksearch"></a>5.5.2. Quicksearch</h3></div></div></div><p>
Quicksearch is a single-text-box query tool which uses
metacharacters to indicate what is to be searched. For example, typing
"<code class="literal">foo|bar</code>"
into Quicksearch would search for "foo" or "bar" in the
summary and status whiteboard of a bug; adding
"<code class="literal">:BazProduct</code>" would
search only in that product.
You can use it to find a bug by its number or its alias, too.
</p><p>
You'll find the Quicksearch box in Bugzilla's footer area.
On Bugzilla's front page, there is an additional
<a class="ulink" href="../../page.cgi?id=quicksearch.html" target="_top">Help</a>
link which details how to use it.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="casesensitivity"></a>5.5.3. Case Sensitivity in Searches</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla queries are case-insensitive and accent-insensitive, when
used with either MySQL or Oracle databases. When using Bugzilla with
PostgreSQL, however, some queries are case-sensitive. This is due to
the way PostgreSQL handles case and accent sensitivity.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="list"></a>5.5.4. Bug Lists</h3></div></div></div><p>If you run a search, a list of matching bugs will be returned.
</p><p>The format of the list is configurable. For example, it can be
sorted by clicking the column headings. Other useful features can be
accessed using the links at the bottom of the list:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">Long Format:</span></dt><dd><p>
this gives you a large page with a non-editable summary of the fields
of each bug.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">XML:</span></dt><dd><p>
get the buglist in the XML format.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">CSV:</span></dt><dd><p>
get the buglist as comma-separated values, for import into e.g.
a spreadsheet.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Feed:</span></dt><dd><p>
get the buglist as an Atom feed. Copy this link into your
favorite feed reader. If you are using Firefox, you can also
save the list as a live bookmark by clicking the live bookmark
icon in the status bar. To limit the number of bugs in the feed,
add a limit=n parameter to the URL.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">iCalendar:</span></dt><dd><p>
Get the buglist as an iCalendar file. Each bug is represented as a
to-do item in the imported calendar.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Change Columns:</span></dt><dd><p>
change the bug attributes which appear in the list.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Change several bugs at once:</span></dt><dd><p>
If your account is sufficiently empowered, and more than one bug
appear in the bug list, this link is displayed which lets you make
the same change to all the bugs in the list - for example, changing
their assignee.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Send mail to bug assignees:</span></dt><dd><p>
If more than one bug appear in the bug list and there are at least
two distinct bug assignees, this links is displayed which lets you
easily send a mail to the assignees of all bugs on the list.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Edit Search:</span></dt><dd><p>
If you didn't get exactly the results you were looking for, you can
return to the Query page through this link and make small revisions
to the query you just made so you get more accurate results.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">Remember Search As:</span></dt><dd><p>
You can give a search a name and remember it; a link will appear
in your page footer giving you quick access to run it again later.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="individual-buglists"></a>5.5.5. Adding/removing tags to/from bugs</h3></div></div></div><p>
You can add and remove tags from individual bugs, which let you find and
manage bugs more easily. Tags are per-user and so are only visible and editable
by the user who created them. You can then run queries using tags as a criteria,
either by using the Advanced Search form, or simply by typing "tag:my_tag_name"
in the QuickSearch box at the top (or bottom) of the page. Tags can also be
displayed in buglists.
</p><p>
This feature is useful when you want to keep track of several bugs, but
for different reasons. Instead of adding yourself to the CC list of all
these bugs and mixing all these reasons, you can now store these bugs in
separate lists, e.g. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Keep in mind</span>”</span>, <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Interesting bugs</span>”</span>,
or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Triage</span>”</span>. One big advantage of this way to manage bugs
is that you can easily add or remove tags from bugs one by one.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="bugreports"></a>5.6. Filing Bugs</h2></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="fillingbugs"></a>5.6.1. Reporting a New Bug</h3></div></div></div><p>Years of bug writing experience has been distilled for your
reading pleasure into the
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/page.cgi?id=bug-writing.html" target="_top">
Bug Writing Guidelines</a>.
While some of the advice is Mozilla-specific, the basic principles of
reporting Reproducible, Specific bugs, isolating the Product you are
using, the Version of the Product, the Component which failed, the
Hardware Platform, and Operating System you were using at the time of
the failure go a long way toward ensuring accurate, responsible fixes
for the bug that bit you.</p><p>The procedure for filing a bug is as follows:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>
Click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">New</span>”</span> link available in the footer
of pages, or the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Enter a new bug report</span>”</span> link
displayed on the home page of the Bugzilla installation.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you want to file a test bug to see how Bugzilla works,
you can do it on one of our test installations on
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.4-branch/" target="_top">Landfill</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
You first have to select the product in which you found a bug.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
You now see a form where you can specify the component (part of
the product which is affected by the bug you discovered; if you have
no idea, just select <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">General</span>”</span> if such a component exists),
the version of the program you were using, the Operating System and
platform your program is running on and the severity of the bug (if the
bug you found crashes the program, it's probably a major or a critical
bug; if it's a typo somewhere, that's something pretty minor; if it's
something you would like to see implemented, then that's an enhancement).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
You now have to give a short but descriptive summary of the bug you found.
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">My program is crashing all the time</span>”</span> is a very poor summary
and doesn't help developers at all. Try something more meaningful or
your bug will probably be ignored due to a lack of precision.
The next step is to give a very detailed list of steps to reproduce
the problem you encountered. Try to limit these steps to a minimum set
required to reproduce the problem. This will make the life of
developers easier, and the probability that they consider your bug in
a reasonable timeframe will be much higher.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Try to make sure that everything in the summary is also in the first
comment. Summaries are often updated and this will ensure your original
information is easily accessible.
</p></td></tr></table></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>
As you file the bug, you can also attach a document (testcase, patch,
or screenshot of the problem).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Depending on the Bugzilla installation you are using and the product in
which you are filing the bug, you can also request developers to consider
your bug in different ways (such as requesting review for the patch you
just attached, requesting your bug to block the next release of the
product, and many other product specific requests).
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Now is a good time to read your bug report again. Remove all misspellings,
otherwise your bug may not be found by developers running queries for some
specific words, and so your bug would not get any attention.
Also make sure you didn't forget any important information developers
should know in order to reproduce the problem, and make sure your
description of the problem is explicit and clear enough.
When you think your bug report is ready to go, the last step is to
click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Commit</span>”</span> button to add your report into the database.
</p></li></ol></div><p>
You do not need to put "any" or similar strings in the URL field.
If there is no specific URL associated with the bug, leave this
field blank.
</p><p>If you feel a bug you filed was incorrectly marked as a
DUPLICATE of another, please question it in your bug, not
the bug it was duped to. Feel free to CC the person who duped it
if they are not already CCed.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="cloningbugs"></a>5.6.2. Clone an Existing Bug</h3></div></div></div><p>
Starting with version 2.20, Bugzilla has a feature that allows you
to clone an existing bug. The newly created bug will inherit
most settings from the old bug. This allows you to track more
easily similar concerns in a new bug. To use this, go to the bug
that you want to clone, then click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Clone This Bug</span>”</span>
link on the bug page. This will take you to the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Enter Bug</span>”</span>
page that is filled with the values that the old bug has.
You can change those values and/or texts if needed.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="attachments"></a>5.7. Attachments</h2></div></div></div><p>
You should use attachments, rather than comments, for large chunks of ASCII
data, such as trace, debugging output files, or log files. That way, it
doesn't bloat the bug for everyone who wants to read it, and cause people to
receive fat, useless mails.
</p><p>You should make sure to trim screenshots. There's no need to show the
whole screen if you are pointing out a single-pixel problem.
</p><p>Bugzilla stores and uses a Content-Type for each attachment
(e.g. text/html). To download an attachment as a different
Content-Type (e.g. application/xhtml+xml), you can override this
using a 'content_type' parameter on the URL, e.g.
<code class="filename">&content_type=text/plain</code>.
</p><p>
Also, you can enter the URL pointing to the attachment instead of
uploading the attachment itself. For example, this is useful if you want to
point to an external application, a website or a very large file. Note that
there is no guarantee that the source file will always be available, nor
that its content will remain unchanged.
</p><p>
Another way to attach data is to paste text directly in the text field,
and Bugzilla will convert it into an attachment. This is pretty useful
when you do copy and paste, and you don't want to put the text in a temporary
file first.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="patchviewer"></a>5.7.1. Patch Viewer</h3></div></div></div><p>Viewing and reviewing patches in Bugzilla is often difficult due to
lack of context, improper format and the inherent readability issues that
raw patches present. Patch Viewer is an enhancement to Bugzilla designed
to fix that by offering increased context, linking to sections, and
integrating with Bonsai, LXR and CVS.</p><p>Patch viewer allows you to:</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>View patches in color, with side-by-side view rather than trying
to interpret the contents of the patch.</td></tr><tr><td>See the difference between two patches.</td></tr><tr><td>Get more context in a patch.</td></tr><tr><td>Collapse and expand sections of a patch for easy
reading.</td></tr><tr><td>Link to a particular section of a patch for discussion or
review</td></tr><tr><td>Go to Bonsai or LXR to see more context, blame, and
cross-references for the part of the patch you are looking at</td></tr><tr><td>Create a rawtext unified format diff out of any patch, no
matter what format it came from</td></tr></table><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_view"></a>5.7.1.1. Viewing Patches in Patch Viewer</h4></div></div></div><p>The main way to view a patch in patch viewer is to click on the
"Diff" link next to a patch in the Attachments list on a bug. You may
also do this within the edit window by clicking the "View Attachment As
Diff" button in the Edit Attachment screen.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_diff"></a>5.7.1.2. Seeing the Difference Between Two Patches</h4></div></div></div><p>To see the difference between two patches, you must first view the
newer patch in Patch Viewer. Then select the older patch from the
dropdown at the top of the page ("Differences between [dropdown] and
this patch") and click the "Diff" button. This will show you what
is new or changed in the newer patch.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_context"></a>5.7.1.3. Getting More Context in a Patch</h4></div></div></div><p>To get more context in a patch, you put a number in the textbox at
the top of Patch Viewer ("Patch / File / [textbox]") and hit enter.
This will give you that many lines of context before and after each
change. Alternatively, you can click on the "File" link there and it
will show each change in the full context of the file. This feature only
works against files that were diffed using "cvs diff".</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_collapse"></a>5.7.1.4. Collapsing and Expanding Sections of a Patch</h4></div></div></div><p>To view only a certain set of files in a patch (for example, if a
patch is absolutely huge and you want to only review part of it at a
time), you can click the "(+)" and "(-)" links next to each file (to
expand it or collapse it). If you want to collapse all files or expand
all files, you can click the "Collapse All" and "Expand All" links at the
top of the page.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_link"></a>5.7.1.5. Linking to a Section of a Patch</h4></div></div></div><p>To link to a section of a patch (for example, if you want to be
able to give someone a URL to show them which part you are talking
about) you simply click the "Link Here" link on the section header. The
resulting URL can be copied and used in discussion.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_bonsai_lxr"></a>5.7.1.6. Going to Bonsai and LXR</h4></div></div></div><p>To go to Bonsai to get blame for the lines you are interested in,
you can click the "Lines XX-YY" link on the section header you are
interested in. This works even if the patch is against an old
version of the file, since Bonsai stores all versions of the file.</p><p>To go to LXR, you click on the filename on the file header
(unfortunately, since LXR only does the most recent version, line
numbers are likely to rot).</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="patchviewer_unified_diff"></a>5.7.1.7. Creating a Unified Diff</h4></div></div></div><p>If the patch is not in a format that you like, you can turn it
into a unified diff format by clicking the "Raw Unified" link at the top
of the page.</p></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="hintsandtips"></a>5.8. Hints and Tips</h2></div></div></div><p>This section distills some Bugzilla tips and best practices
that have been developed.</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354649509344"></a>5.8.1. Autolinkification</h3></div></div></div><p>Bugzilla comments are plain text - so typing <U> will
produce less-than, U, greater-than rather than underlined text.
However, Bugzilla will automatically make hyperlinks out of certain
sorts of text in comments. For example, the text
"http://www.bugzilla.org" will be turned into a link:
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org" target="_top">http://www.bugzilla.org</a>.
Other strings which get linkified in the obvious manner are:
</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>bug 12345</td></tr><tr><td>comment 7</td></tr><tr><td>bug 23456, comment 53</td></tr><tr><td>attachment 4321</td></tr><tr><td>mailto:george@example.com</td></tr><tr><td>george@example.com</td></tr><tr><td>ftp://ftp.mozilla.org</td></tr><tr><td>Most other sorts of URL</td></tr></table><p>
</p><p>A corollary here is that if you type a bug number in a comment,
you should put the word "bug" before it, so it gets autolinkified
for the convenience of others.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="commenting"></a>5.8.2. Comments</h3></div></div></div><p>If you are changing the fields on a bug, only comment if
either you have something pertinent to say, or Bugzilla requires it.
Otherwise, you may spam people unnecessarily with bug mail.
To take an example: a user can set up their account to filter out messages
where someone just adds themselves to the CC field of a bug
(which happens a lot.) If you come along, add yourself to the CC field,
and add a comment saying "Adding self to CC", then that person
gets a pointless piece of mail they would otherwise have avoided.
</p><p>
Don't use sigs in comments. Signing your name ("Bill") is acceptable,
if you do it out of habit, but full mail/news-style
four line ASCII art creations are not.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="comment-wrapping"></a>5.8.3. Server-Side Comment Wrapping</h3></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla stores comments unwrapped and wraps them at display time. This
ensures proper wrapping in all browsers. Lines beginning with the ">"
character are assumed to be quotes, and are not wrapped.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="dependencytree"></a>5.8.4. Dependency Tree</h3></div></div></div><p>
On the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Dependency tree</span>”</span> page linked from each bug
page, you can see the dependency relationship from the bug as a
tree structure.
</p><p>
You can change how much depth to show, and you can hide resolved bugs
from this page. You can also collaps/expand dependencies for
each bug on the tree view, using the [-]/[+] buttons that appear
before its summary. This option is not available for terminal
bugs in the tree (that don't have further dependencies).
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="timetracking"></a>5.9. Time Tracking Information</h2></div></div></div><p>
Users who belong to the group specified by the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">timetrackinggroup</span>”</span>
parameter have access to time-related fields. Developers can see
deadlines and estimated times to fix bugs, and can provide time spent
on these bugs.
</p><p>
At any time, a summary of the time spent by developers on bugs is
accessible either from bug lists when clicking the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Time Summary</span>”</span>
button or from individual bugs when clicking the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Summarize time</span>”</span>
link in the time tracking table. The <code class="filename">summarize_time.cgi</code>
page lets you view this information either per developer or per bug,
and can be split on a month basis to have greater details on how time
is spent by developers.
</p><p>
As soon as a bug is marked as RESOLVED, the remaining time expected
to fix the bug is set to zero. This lets QA people set it again for
their own usage, and it will be set to zero again when the bug will
be marked as CLOSED.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="userpreferences"></a>5.10. User Preferences</h2></div></div></div><p>
Once logged in, you can customize various aspects of
Bugzilla via the "Preferences" link in the page footer.
The preferences are split into five tabs:</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="generalpreferences"></a>5.10.1. General Preferences</h3></div></div></div><p>
This tab allows you to change several default settings of Bugzilla.
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
Bugzilla's general appearance (skin) - select which skin to use.
Bugzilla supports adding custom skins.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Quote the associated comment when you click on its reply link - sets
the behavior of the comment "Reply" link. Options include quoting the
full comment, just reference the comment number, or turn the link off.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Language used in email - select which language email will be sent in,
from the list of available languages.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
After changing a bug - This controls what page is displayed after
changes to a bug are submitted. The options include to show the bug
just modified, to show the next bug in your list, or to do nothing.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Zoom textareas large when in use (requires JavaScript) - enable or
disable the automatic expanding of text areas when text is being
entered into them.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Field separator character for CSV files -
Select between a comma and semi-colon for exported CSV bug lists.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Automatically add me to the CC list of bugs I change - set default
behavior of CC list. Options include "Always", "Never", and "Only
if I have no role on them".
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
When viewing a bug, show comments in this order -
controls the order of comments. Options include "Oldest
to Newest", "Newest to Oldest" and "Newest to Oldest, but keep the
bug description at the top".
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Show a quip at the top of each bug list - controls
whether a quip will be shown on the Bug list page.
</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="emailpreferences"></a>5.10.2. Email Preferences</h3></div></div></div><p>
This tab allows you to enable or disable email notification on
specific events.
</p><p>
In general, users have almost complete control over how much (or
how little) email Bugzilla sends them. If you want to receive the
maximum amount of email possible, click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Enable All
Mail</span>”</span> button. If you don't want to receive any email from
Bugzilla at all, click the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Disable All Mail</span>”</span> button.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
A Bugzilla administrator can stop a user from receiving
bugmail by clicking the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Bugmail Disabled</span>”</span> checkbox
when editing the user account. This is a drastic step
best taken only for disabled accounts, as it overrides
the user's individual mail preferences.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
There are two global options -- <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Email me when someone
asks me to set a flag</span>”</span> and <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Email me when someone
sets a flag I asked for</span>”</span>. These define how you want to
receive bugmail with regards to flags. Their use is quite
straightforward; enable the checkboxes if you want Bugzilla to
send you mail under either of the above conditions.
</p><p>
If you'd like to set your bugmail to something besides
'Completely ON' and 'Completely OFF', the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Field/recipient specific options</span>”</span> table
allows you to do just that. The rows of the table
define events that can happen to a bug -- things like
attachments being added, new comments being made, the
priority changing, etc. The columns in the table define
your relationship with the bug:
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist compact" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
Reporter - Where you are the person who initially
reported the bug. Your name/account appears in the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Reporter:</span>”</span> field.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Assignee - Where you are the person who has been
designated as the one responsible for the bug. Your
name/account appears in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Assigned To:</span>”</span>
field of the bug.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
QA Contact - You are one of the designated
QA Contacts for the bug. Your account appears in the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">QA Contact:</span>”</span> text-box of the bug.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
CC - You are on the list CC List for the bug.
Your account appears in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">CC:</span>”</span> text box
of the bug.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Voter - You have placed one or more votes for the bug.
Your account appears only if someone clicks on the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Show votes for this bug</span>”</span> link on the bug.
</p></li></ul></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Some columns may not be visible for your installation, depending
on your site's configuration.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
To fine-tune your bugmail, decide the events for which you want
to receive bugmail; then decide if you want to receive it all
the time (enable the checkbox for every column), or only when
you have a certain relationship with a bug (enable the checkbox
only for those columns). For example: if you didn't want to
receive mail when someone added themselves to the CC list, you
could uncheck all the boxes in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">CC Field Changes</span>”</span>
line. As another example, if you never wanted to receive email
on bugs you reported unless the bug was resolved, you would
un-check all boxes in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Reporter</span>”</span> column
except for the one on the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">The bug is resolved or
verified</span>”</span> row.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Bugzilla adds the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">X-Bugzilla-Reason</span>”</span> header to
all bugmail it sends, describing the recipient's relationship
(AssignedTo, Reporter, QAContact, CC, or Voter) to the bug.
This header can be used to do further client-side filtering.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Bugzilla has a feature called <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Users Watching</span>”</span>.
When you enter one or more comma-delineated user accounts (usually email
addresses) into the text entry box, you will receive a copy of all the
bugmail those users are sent (security settings permitting).
This powerful functionality enables seamless transitions as developers
change projects or users go on holiday.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The ability to watch other users may not be available in all
Bugzilla installations. If you don't see this feature, and feel
that you need it, speak to your administrator.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Each user listed in the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Users watching you</span>”</span> field
has you listed in their <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Users to watch</span>”</span> list
and can get bugmail according to your relationship to the bug and
their <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Field/recipient specific options</span>”</span> setting.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="savedsearches"></a>5.10.3. Saved Searches</h3></div></div></div><p>
On this tab you can view and run any Saved Searches that you have
created, and also any Saved Searches that other members of the group
defined in the "querysharegroup" parameter have shared.
Saved Searches can be added to the page footer from this screen.
If somebody is sharing a Search with a group she or he is allowed to
<a class="link" href="#groups" title="3.15. Groups and Group Security">assign users to</a>, the sharer may opt to have
the Search show up in the footer of the group's direct members by default.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="accountpreferences"></a>5.10.4. Name and Password</h3></div></div></div><p>On this tab, you can change your basic account information,
including your password, email address and real name. For security
reasons, in order to change anything on this page you must type your
<span class="emphasis"><em>current</em></span> password into the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Password</span>”</span>
field at the top of the page.
If you attempt to change your email address, a confirmation
email is sent to both the old and new addresses, with a link to use to
confirm the change. This helps to prevent account hijacking.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="permissionsettings"></a>5.10.5. Permissions</h3></div></div></div><p>
This is a purely informative page which outlines your current
permissions on this installation of Bugzilla.
</p><p>
A complete list of permissions is below. Only users with
<span class="emphasis"><em>editusers</em></span> privileges can change the permissions
of other users.
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term">
admin
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user is an Administrator.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
bz_canusewhineatothers
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can configure whine reports for other users.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
bz_canusewhines
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can configure whine reports for self.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
bz_quip_moderators
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can moderate quips.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
bz_sudoers
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can perform actions as other users.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
bz_sudo_protect
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user cannot be impersonated by other users.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
canconfirm
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can confirm a bug or mark it a duplicate.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
creategroups
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can create and destroy groups.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
editbugs
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can edit all bug fields.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
editclassifications
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can create, destroy, and edit classifications.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
editcomponents
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can create, destroy, and edit components.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
editkeywords
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can create, destroy, and edit keywords.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
editusers
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can edit or disable users.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term">
tweakparams
</span></dt><dd><p>
Indicates user can change Parameters.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
For more information on how permissions work in Bugzilla (i.e. who can
change what), see <a class="xref" href="#cust-change-permissions" title="6.4. Customizing Who Can Change What">Section 6.4, “Customizing Who Can Change What”</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="reporting"></a>5.11. Reports and Charts</h2></div></div></div><p>As well as the standard buglist, Bugzilla has two more ways of
viewing sets of bugs. These are the reports (which give different
views of the current state of the database) and charts (which plot
the changes in particular sets of bugs over time.)</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="reports"></a>5.11.1. Reports</h3></div></div></div><p>
A report is a view of the current state of the bug database.
</p><p>
You can run either an HTML-table-based report, or a graphical
line/pie/bar-chart-based one. The two have different pages to
define them, but are close cousins - once you've defined and
viewed a report, you can switch between any of the different
views of the data at will.
</p><p>
Both report types are based on the idea of defining a set of bugs
using the standard search interface, and then choosing some
aspect of that set to plot on the horizontal and/or vertical axes.
You can also get a form of 3-dimensional report by choosing to have
multiple images or tables.
</p><p>
So, for example, you could use the search form to choose "all
bugs in the WorldControl product", and then plot their severity
against their component to see which component had had the largest
number of bad bugs reported against it.
</p><p>
Once you've defined your parameters and hit "Generate Report",
you can switch between HTML, CSV, Bar, Line and Pie. (Note: Pie
is only available if you didn't define a vertical axis, as pie
charts don't have one.) The other controls are fairly self-explanatory;
you can change the size of the image if you find text is overwriting
other text, or the bars are too thin to see.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="charts"></a>5.11.2. Charts</h3></div></div></div><p>
A chart is a view of the state of the bug database over time.
</p><p>
Bugzilla currently has two charting systems - Old Charts and New
Charts. Old Charts have been part of Bugzilla for a long time; they
chart each status and resolution for each product, and that's all.
They are deprecated, and going away soon - we won't say any more
about them.
New Charts are the future - they allow you to chart anything you
can define as a search.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Both charting forms require the administrator to set up the
data-gathering script. If you can't see any charts, ask them whether
they have done so.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
An individual line on a chart is called a data set.
All data sets are organised into categories and subcategories. The
data sets that Bugzilla defines automatically use the Product name
as a Category and Component names as Subcategories, but there is no
need for you to follow that naming scheme with your own charts if
you don't want to.
</p><p>
Data sets may be public or private. Everyone sees public data sets in
the list, but only their creator sees private data sets. Only
administrators can make data sets public.
No two data sets, even two private ones, can have the same set of
category, subcategory and name. So if you are creating private data
sets, one idea is to have the Category be your username.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="idm140354653490672"></a>5.11.2.1. Creating Charts</h4></div></div></div><p>
You create a chart by selecting a number of data sets from the
list, and pressing Add To List for each. In the List Of Data Sets
To Plot, you can define the label that data set will have in the
chart's legend, and also ask Bugzilla to Sum a number of data sets
(e.g. you could Sum data sets representing RESOLVED, VERIFIED and
CLOSED in a particular product to get a data set representing all
the resolved bugs in that product.)
</p><p>
If you've erroneously added a data set to the list, select it
using the checkbox and click Remove. Once you add more than one
data set, a "Grand Total" line
automatically appears at the bottom of the list. If you don't want
this, simply remove it as you would remove any other line.
</p><p>
You may also choose to plot only over a certain date range, and
to cumulate the results - that is, to plot each one using the
previous one as a baseline, so the top line gives a sum of all
the data sets. It's easier to try than to explain :-)
</p><p>
Once a data set is in the list, one can also perform certain
actions on it. For example, one can edit the
data set's parameters (name, frequency etc.) if it's one you
created or if you are an administrator.
</p><p>
Once you are happy, click Chart This List to see the chart.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title"><a name="charts-new-series"></a>5.11.2.2. Creating New Data Sets</h4></div></div></div><p>
You may also create new data sets of your own. To do this,
click the "create a new data set" link on the Create Chart page.
This takes you to a search-like interface where you can define
the search that Bugzilla will plot. At the bottom of the page,
you choose the category, sub-category and name of your new
data set.
</p><p>
If you have sufficient permissions, you can make the data set public,
and reduce the frequency of data collection to less than the default
seven days.
</p></div></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="flags"></a>5.12. Flags</h2></div></div></div><p>
A flag is a kind of status that can be set on bugs or attachments
to indicate that the bugs/attachments are in a certain state.
Each installation can define its own set of flags that can be set
on bugs or attachments.
</p><p>
If your installation has defined a flag, you can set or unset that flag,
and if your administrator has enabled requesting of flags, you can submit
a request for another user to set the flag.
</p><p>
To set a flag, select either "+" or "-" from the drop-down menu next to
the name of the flag in the "Flags" list. The meaning of these values are
flag-specific and thus cannot be described in this documentation,
but by way of example, setting a flag named "review" to "+" may indicate
that the bug/attachment has passed review, while setting it to "-"
may indicate that the bug/attachment has failed review.
</p><p>
To unset a flag, click its drop-down menu and select the blank value.
Note that marking an attachment as obsolete automatically cancels all
pending requests for the attachment.
</p><p>
If your administrator has enabled requests for a flag, request a flag
by selecting "?" from the drop-down menu and then entering the username
of the user you want to set the flag in the text field next to the menu.
</p><p>
A set flag appears in bug reports and on "edit attachment" pages with the
abbreviated username of the user who set the flag prepended to the
flag name. For example, if Jack sets a "review" flag to "+", it appears
as Jack: review [ + ]
</p><p>
A requested flag appears with the user who requested the flag prepended
to the flag name and the user who has been requested to set the flag
appended to the flag name within parentheses. For example, if Jack
asks Jill for review, it appears as Jack: review [ ? ] (Jill).
</p><p>
You can browse through open requests made of you and by you by selecting
'My Requests' from the footer. You can also look at open requests limited
by other requesters, requestees, products, components, and flag names from
this page. Note that you can use '-' for requestee to specify flags with
'no requestee' set.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="whining"></a>5.13. Whining</h2></div></div></div><p>
Whining is a feature in Bugzilla that can regularly annoy users at
specified times. Using this feature, users can execute saved searches
at specific times (i.e. the 15th of the month at midnight) or at
regular intervals (i.e. every 15 minutes on Sundays). The results of the
searches are sent to the user, either as a single email or as one email
per bug, along with some descriptive text.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Throughout this section it will be assumed that all users are members
of the bz_canusewhines group, membership in which is required in order
to use the Whining system. You can easily make all users members of
the bz_canusewhines group by setting the User RegExp to ".*" (without
the quotes).
</p><p>
Also worth noting is the bz_canusewhineatothers group. Members of this
group can create whines for any user or group in Bugzilla using a
extended form of the whining interface. Features only available to
members of the bz_canusewhineatothers group will be noted in the
appropriate places.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
For whining to work, a special Perl script must be executed at regular
intervals. More information on this is available in
<a class="xref" href="#installation-whining" title="2.3.3. Whining">Section 2.3.3, “Whining”</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
This section does not cover the whineatnews.pl script. See
<a class="xref" href="#installation-whining-cron" title="2.3.2. The Whining Cron">Section 2.3.2, “The Whining Cron”</a> for more information on
The Whining Cron.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="whining-overview"></a>5.13.1. The Event</h3></div></div></div><p>
The whining system defines an "Event" as one or more queries being
executed at regular intervals, with the results of said queries (if
there are any) being emailed to the user. Events are created by
clicking on the "Add new event" button.
</p><p>
Once a new event is created, the first thing to set is the "Email
subject line". The contents of this field will be used in the subject
line of every email generated by this event. In addition to setting a
subject, space is provided to enter some descriptive text that will be
included at the top of each message (to help you in understanding why
you received the email in the first place).
</p><p>
The next step is to specify when the Event is to be run (the Schedule)
and what searches are to be performed (the Searches).
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="whining-schedule"></a>5.13.2. Whining Schedule</h3></div></div></div><p>
Each whining event is associated with zero or more schedules. A
schedule is used to specify when the query (specified below) is to be
run. A new event starts out with no schedules (which means it will
never run, as it is not scheduled to run). To add a schedule, press
the "Add a new schedule" button.
</p><p>
Each schedule includes an interval, which you use to tell Bugzilla
when the event should be run. An event can be run on certain days of
the week, certain days of the month, during weekdays (defined as
Monday through Friday), or every day.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Be careful if you set your event to run on the 29th, 30th, or 31st of
the month, as your event may not run exactly when expected. If you
want your event to run on the last day of the month, select "Last day
of the month" as the interval.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Once you have specified the day(s) on which the event is to be run, you
should now specify the time at which the event is to be run. You can
have the event run at a certain hour on the specified day(s), or
every hour, half-hour, or quarter-hour on the specified day(s).
</p><p>
If a single schedule does not execute an event as many times as you
would want, you can create another schedule for the same event. For
example, if you want to run an event on days whose numbers are
divisible by seven, you would need to add four schedules to the event,
setting the schedules to run on the 7th, 14th, 21st, and 28th (one day
per schedule) at whatever time (or times) you choose.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you are a member of the bz_canusewhineatothers group, then you
will be presented with another option: "Mail to". Using this you
can control who will receive the emails generated by this event. You
can choose to send the emails to a single user (identified by email
address) or a single group (identified by group name). To send to
multiple users or groups, create a new schedule for each additional
user/group.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="whining-query"></a>5.13.3. Whining Searches</h3></div></div></div><p>
Each whining event is associated with zero or more searches. A search
is any saved search to be run as part of the specified schedule (see
above). You start out without any searches associated with the event
(which means that the event will not run, as there will never be any
results to return). To add a search, press the "Include search" button.
</p><p>
The first field to examine in your newly added search is the Sort field.
Searches are run, and results included, in the order specified by the
Sort field. Searches with smaller Sort values will run before searches
with bigger Sort values.
</p><p>
The next field to examine is the Search field. This is where you
choose the actual search that is to be run. Instead of defining search
parameters here, you are asked to choose from the list of saved
searches (the same list that appears at the bottom of every Bugzilla
page). You are only allowed to choose from searches that you have
saved yourself (the default saved search, "My Bugs", is not a valid
choice). If you do not have any saved searches, you can take this
opportunity to create one (see <a class="xref" href="#list" title="5.5.4. Bug Lists">Section 5.5.4, “Bug Lists”</a>).
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
When running queries, the whining system acts as if you are the user
executing the query. This means that the whining system will ignore
bugs that match your query, but that you cannot access.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Once you have chosen the saved search to be executed, give the query a
descriptive title. This title will appear in the email, above the
results of the query. If you choose "One message per bug", the query
title will appear at the top of each email that contains a bug matching
your query.
</p><p>
Finally, decide if the results of the query should be sent in a single
email, or if each bug should appear in its own email.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Think carefully before checking the "One message per bug" box. If
you create a query that matches thousands of bugs, you will receive
thousands of emails!
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="idm140354648282208"></a>5.13.4. Saving Your Changes</h3></div></div></div><p>
Once you have defined at least one schedule, and created at least one
query, go ahead and "Update/Commit". This will save your Event and make
it available for immediate execution.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you ever feel like deleting your event, you may do so using the
"Remove Event" button in the upper-right corner of each Event. You
can also modify an existing event, so long as you "Update/Commit"
after completing your modifications.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div></div></div><div class="chapter"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="customization"></a>Chapter 6. Customizing Bugzilla</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#extensions">6.1. Bugzilla Extensions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-skins">6.2. Custom Skins</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-templates">6.3. Template Customization</a></span></dt><dd><dl><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-directory">6.3.1. Template Directory Structure</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-method">6.3.2. Choosing a Customization Method</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-edit">6.3.3. How To Edit Templates</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-formats">6.3.4. Template Formats and Types</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-specific">6.3.5. Particular Templates</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#template-http-accept">6.3.6. Configuring Bugzilla to Detect the User's Language</a></span></dt></dl></dd><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cust-change-permissions">6.4. Customizing Who Can Change What</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#integration">6.5. Integrating Bugzilla with Third-Party Tools</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="extensions"></a>6.1. Bugzilla Extensions</h2></div></div></div><p>
One of the best ways to customize Bugzilla is by writing a Bugzilla
Extension. Bugzilla Extensions let you modify both the code and
UI of Bugzilla in a way that can be distributed to other Bugzilla
users and ported forward to future versions of Bugzilla with minimal
effort.
</p><p>
See the <a class="ulink" href="../html/api/Bugzilla/Extension.html" target="_top">Bugzilla Extension
documentation</a> for information on how to write an Extension.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="cust-skins"></a>6.2. Custom Skins</h2></div></div></div><p>
Bugzilla allows you to have multiple skins. These are custom CSS and possibly
also custom images for Bugzilla. To create a new custom skin, you have two
choices:
</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" style="list-style-type: disc; "><li class="listitem"><p>
Make a single CSS file, and put it in the
<code class="filename">skins/contrib</code> directory.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>
Make a directory that contains all the same CSS file
names as <code class="filename">skins/standard/</code>, and put
your directory in <code class="filename">skins/contrib/</code>.
</p></li></ul></div><p>
</p><p>
After you put the file or the directory there, make sure to run checksetup.pl
so that it can reset the file permissions correctly.
</p><p>
After you have installed the new skin, it will show up as an option in the
user's General Preferences. If you would like to force a particular skin on all
users, just select it in the Default Preferences and then uncheck "Enabled" on
the preference.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="cust-templates"></a>6.3. Template Customization</h2></div></div></div><p>
Administrators can configure the look and feel of Bugzilla without
having to edit Perl files or face the nightmare of massive merge
conflicts when they upgrade to a newer version in the future.
</p><p>
Templatization also makes localized versions of Bugzilla possible,
for the first time. It's possible to have Bugzilla's UI language
determined by the user's browser. More information is available in
<a class="xref" href="#template-http-accept" title="6.3.6. Configuring Bugzilla to Detect the User's Language">Section 6.3.6, “Configuring Bugzilla to Detect the User's Language”</a>.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-directory"></a>6.3.1. Template Directory Structure</h3></div></div></div><p>
The template directory structure starts with top level directory
named <code class="filename">template</code>, which contains a directory
for each installed localization. The next level defines the
language used in the templates. Bugzilla comes with English
templates, so the directory name is <code class="filename">en</code>,
and we will discuss <code class="filename">template/en</code> throughout
the documentation. Below <code class="filename">template/en</code> is the
<code class="filename">default</code> directory, which contains all the
standard templates shipped with Bugzilla.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
A directory <code class="filename">data/templates</code> also exists;
this is where Template Toolkit puts the compiled versions of
the templates from either the default or custom directories.
<span class="emphasis"><em>Do not</em></span> directly edit the files in this
directory, or all your changes will be lost the next time
Template Toolkit recompiles the templates.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-method"></a>6.3.2. Choosing a Customization Method</h3></div></div></div><p>
If you want to edit Bugzilla's templates, the first decision
you must make is how you want to go about doing so. There are two
choices, and which you use depends mainly on the scope of your
modifications, and the method you plan to use to upgrade Bugzilla.
</p><p>
The first method of making customizations is to directly edit the
templates found in <code class="filename">template/en/default</code>.
This is probably the best way to go about it if you are going to
be upgrading Bugzilla through Bzr, because if you then execute
a <span class="command"><strong>bzr update</strong></span>, any changes you have made will
be merged automagically with the updated versions.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you use this method, and Bzr conflicts occur during an
update, the conflicted templates (and possibly other parts
of your installation) will not work until they are resolved.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
The second method is to copy the templates to be modified
into a mirrored directory structure under
<code class="filename">template/en/custom</code>. Templates in this
directory structure automatically override any identically-named
and identically-located templates in the
<code class="filename">default</code> directory.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
The <code class="filename">custom</code> directory does not exist
at first and must be created if you want to use it.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
The second method of customization should be used if you
use the overwriting method of upgrade, because otherwise
your changes will be lost. This method may also be better if
you are using the Bzr method of upgrading and are going to make major
changes, because it is guaranteed that the contents of this directory
will not be touched during an upgrade, and you can then decide whether
to continue using your own templates, or make the effort to merge your
changes into the new versions by hand.
</p><p>
Using this method, your installation may break if incompatible
changes are made to the template interface. Such changes should
be documented in the release notes, provided you are using a
stable release of Bugzilla. If you use using unstable code, you will
need to deal with this one yourself, although if possible the changes
will be mentioned before they occur in the deprecations section of the
previous stable release's release notes.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Regardless of which method you choose, it is recommended that
you run <span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span> after
editing any templates in the <code class="filename">template/en/default</code>
directory, and after creating or editing any templates in the
<code class="filename">custom</code> directory.
</p></td></tr></table></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
It is <span class="emphasis"><em>required</em></span> that you run
<span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span> after creating a new
template in the <code class="filename">custom</code> directory. Failure
to do so will raise an incomprehensible error message.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-edit"></a>6.3.3. How To Edit Templates</h3></div></div></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you are making template changes that you intend on submitting back
for inclusion in standard Bugzilla, you should read the relevant
sections of the
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/docs/developer.html" target="_top">Developers'
Guide</a>.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
The syntax of the Template Toolkit language is beyond the scope of
this guide. It's reasonably easy to pick up by looking at the current
templates; or, you can read the manual, available on the
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.template-toolkit.org" target="_top">Template Toolkit home
page</a>.
</p><p>
One thing you should take particular care about is the need
to properly HTML filter data that has been passed into the template.
This means that if the data can possibly contain special HTML characters
such as <, and the data was not intended to be HTML, they need to be
converted to entity form, i.e. &lt;. You use the 'html' filter in the
Template Toolkit to do this (or the 'uri' filter to encode special
characters in URLs). If you forget, you may open up your installation
to cross-site scripting attacks.
</p><p>
Editing templates is a good way of doing a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">poor man's custom
fields</span>”</span>.
For example, if you don't use the Status Whiteboard, but want to have
a free-form text entry box for <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Build Identifier</span>”</span>,
then you can just
edit the templates to change the field labels. It's still be called
status_whiteboard internally, but your users don't need to know that.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-formats"></a>6.3.4. Template Formats and Types</h3></div></div></div><p>
Some CGI's have the ability to use more than one template. For example,
<code class="filename">buglist.cgi</code> can output itself as RDF, or as two
formats of HTML (complex and simple). The mechanism that provides this
feature is extensible.
</p><p>
Bugzilla can support different types of output, which again can have
multiple formats. In order to request a certain type, you can append
the &ctype=<contenttype> (such as rdf or html) to the
<code class="filename"><cginame>.cgi</code> URL. If you would like to
retrieve a certain format, you can use the &format=<format>
(such as simple or complex) in the URL.
</p><p>
To see if a CGI supports multiple output formats and types, grep the
CGI for <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">get_format</span>”</span>. If it's not present, adding
multiple format/type support isn't too hard - see how it's done in
other CGIs, e.g. config.cgi.
</p><p>
To make a new format template for a CGI which supports this,
open a current template for
that CGI and take note of the INTERFACE comment (if present.) This
comment defines what variables are passed into this template. If
there isn't one, I'm afraid you'll have to read the template and
the code to find out what information you get.
</p><p>
Write your template in whatever markup or text style is appropriate.
</p><p>
You now need to decide what content type you want your template
served as. The content types are defined in the
<code class="filename">Bugzilla/Constants.pm</code> file in the
<code class="filename">contenttypes</code>
constant. If your content type is not there, add it. Remember
the three- or four-letter tag assigned to your content type.
This tag will be part of the template filename.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
After adding or changing a content type, it's suitable to edit
<code class="filename">Bugzilla/Constants.pm</code> in order to reflect
the changes. Also, the file should be kept up to date after an
upgrade if content types have been customized in the past.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Save the template as <code class="filename"><stubname>-<formatname>.<contenttypetag>.tmpl</code>.
Try out the template by calling the CGI as
<code class="filename"><cginame>.cgi?format=<formatname>&ctype=<type></code> .
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-specific"></a>6.3.5. Particular Templates</h3></div></div></div><p>
There are a few templates you may be particularly interested in
customizing for your installation.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>index.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This is the Bugzilla front page.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>global/header.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This defines the header that goes on all Bugzilla pages.
The header includes the banner, which is what appears to users
and is probably what you want to edit instead. However the
header also includes the HTML HEAD section, so you could for
example add a stylesheet or META tag by editing the header.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>global/banner.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This contains the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">banner</span>”</span>, the part of the header
that appears
at the top of all Bugzilla pages. The default banner is reasonably
barren, so you'll probably want to customize this to give your
installation a distinctive look and feel. It is recommended you
preserve the Bugzilla version number in some form so the version
you are running can be determined, and users know what docs to read.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>global/footer.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This defines the footer that goes on all Bugzilla pages. Editing
this is another way to quickly get a distinctive look and feel for
your Bugzilla installation.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>global/variables.none.tmpl</strong></span>:
This defines a list of terms that may be changed in order to
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">brand</span>”</span> the Bugzilla instance In this way, terms
like <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">bugs</span>”</span> can be replaced with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">issues</span>”</span>
across the whole Bugzilla installation. The name
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Bugzilla</span>”</span> and other words can be customized as well.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>list/table.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This template controls the appearance of the bug lists created
by Bugzilla. Editing this template allows per-column control of
the width and title of a column, the maximum display length of
each entry, and the wrap behaviour of long entries.
For long bug lists, Bugzilla inserts a 'break' every 100 bugs by
default; this behaviour is also controlled by this template, and
that value can be modified here.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>bug/create/user-message.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This is a message that appears near the top of the bug reporting page.
By modifying this, you can tell your users how they should report
bugs.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>bug/process/midair.html.tmpl</strong></span>:
This is the page used if two people submit simultaneous changes to the
same bug. The second person to submit their changes will get this page
to tell them what the first person did, and ask if they wish to
overwrite those changes or go back and revisit the bug. The default
title and header on this page read "Mid-air collision detected!" If
you work in the aviation industry, or other environment where this
might be found offensive (yes, we have true stories of this happening)
you'll want to change this to something more appropriate for your
environment.
</p><p>
<span class="command"><strong>bug/create/create.html.tmpl</strong></span> and
<span class="command"><strong>bug/create/comment.txt.tmpl</strong></span>:
You may not wish to go to the effort of creating custom fields in
Bugzilla, yet you want to make sure that each bug report contains
a number of pieces of important information for which there is not
a special field. The bug entry system has been designed in an
extensible fashion to enable you to add arbitrary HTML widgets,
such as drop-down lists or textboxes, to the bug entry page
and have their values appear formatted in the initial comment.
A hidden field that indicates the format should be added inside
the form in order to make the template functional. Its value should
be the suffix of the template filename. For example, if the file
is called <code class="filename">create-cust.html.tmpl</code>, then
</p><pre class="programlisting"><input type="hidden" name="format" value="cust"></pre><p>
should be used inside the form.
</p><p>
An example of this is the mozilla.org
<a class="ulink" href="http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-tip/enter_bug.cgi?product=WorldControl;format=guided" target="_top">guided
bug submission form</a>. The code for this comes with the Bugzilla
distribution as an example for you to copy. It can be found in the
files
<code class="filename">create-guided.html.tmpl</code> and
<code class="filename">comment-guided.html.tmpl</code>.
</p><p>
So to use this feature, create a custom template for
<code class="filename">enter_bug.cgi</code>. The default template, on which you
could base it, is
<code class="filename">custom/bug/create/create.html.tmpl</code>.
Call it <code class="filename">create-<formatname>.html.tmpl</code>, and
in it, add widgets for each piece of information you'd like
collected - such as a build number, or set of steps to reproduce.
</p><p>
Then, create a template like
<code class="filename">custom/bug/create/comment.txt.tmpl</code>, and call it
<code class="filename">comment-<formatname>.txt.tmpl</code>. This
template should reference the form fields you have created using
the syntax <code class="filename">[% form.<fieldname> %]</code>. When a
bug report is
submitted, the initial comment attached to the bug report will be
formatted according to the layout of this template.
</p><p>
For example, if your custom enter_bug template had a field
</p><pre class="programlisting"><input type="text" name="buildid" size="30"></pre><p>
and then your comment.txt.tmpl had
</p><pre class="programlisting">BuildID: [% form.buildid %]</pre><p>
then something like
</p><pre class="programlisting">BuildID: 20020303</pre><p>
would appear in the initial comment.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="template-http-accept"></a>6.3.6. Configuring Bugzilla to Detect the User's Language</h3></div></div></div><p>Bugzilla honours the user's Accept: HTTP header. You can install
templates in other languages, and Bugzilla will pick the most appropriate
according to a priority order defined by you. Many
language templates can be obtained from <a class="ulink" href="http://www.bugzilla.org/download.html#localizations" target="_top">http://www.bugzilla.org/download.html#localizations</a>. Instructions
for submitting new languages are also available from that location.
</p></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="cust-change-permissions"></a>6.4. Customizing Who Can Change What</h2></div></div></div><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
This feature should be considered experimental; the Bugzilla code you
will be changing is not stable, and could change or move between
versions. Be aware that if you make modifications as outlined here,
you may have
to re-make them or port them if Bugzilla changes internally between
versions, and you upgrade.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
Companies often have rules about which employees, or classes of employees,
are allowed to change certain things in the bug system. For example,
only the bug's designated QA Contact may be allowed to VERIFY the bug.
Bugzilla has been
designed to make it easy for you to write your own custom rules to define
who is allowed to make what sorts of value transition.
</p><p>
By default, assignees, QA owners and users
with <span class="emphasis"><em>editbugs</em></span> privileges can edit all fields of bugs,
except group restrictions (unless they are members of the groups they
are trying to change). Bug reporters also have the ability to edit some
fields, but in a more restrictive manner. Other users, without
<span class="emphasis"><em>editbugs</em></span> privileges, cannot edit
bugs, except to comment and add themselves to the CC list.
</p><p>
For maximum flexibility, customizing this means editing Bugzilla's Perl
code. This gives the administrator complete control over exactly who is
allowed to do what. The relevant method is called
<code class="filename">check_can_change_field()</code>,
and is found in <code class="filename">Bug.pm</code> in your
Bugzilla/ directory. If you open that file and search for
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">sub check_can_change_field</span>”</span>, you'll find it.
</p><p>
This function has been carefully commented to allow you to see exactly
how it works, and give you an idea of how to make changes to it.
Certain marked sections should not be changed - these are
the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">plumbing</span>”</span> which makes the rest of the function work.
In between those sections, you'll find snippets of code like:
</p><pre class="programlisting"> # Allow the assignee to change anything.
if ($ownerid eq $whoid) {
return 1;
}</pre><p>
It's fairly obvious what this piece of code does.
</p><p>
So, how does one go about changing this function? Well, simple changes
can be made just by removing pieces - for example, if you wanted to
prevent any user adding a comment to a bug, just remove the lines marked
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Allow anyone to change comments.</span>”</span> If you don't want the
Reporter to have any special rights on bugs they have filed, just
remove the entire section that deals with the Reporter.
</p><p>
More complex customizations are not much harder. Basically, you add
a check in the right place in the function, i.e. after all the variables
you are using have been set up. So, don't look at $ownerid before
$ownerid has been obtained from the database. You can either add a
positive check, which returns 1 (allow) if certain conditions are true,
or a negative check, which returns 0 (deny.) E.g.:
</p><pre class="programlisting"> if ($field eq "qacontact") {
if (Bugzilla->user->in_group("quality_assurance")) {
return 1;
}
else {
return 0;
}
}</pre><p>
This says that only users in the group "quality_assurance" can change
the QA Contact field of a bug.
</p><p>
Getting more weird:
</p><pre class="programlisting"> if (($field eq "priority") &&
(Bugzilla->user->email =~ /.*\@example\.com$/))
{
if ($oldvalue eq "P1") {
return 1;
}
else {
return 0;
}
}</pre><p>
This says that if the user is trying to change the priority field,
and their email address is @example.com, they can only do so if the
old value of the field was "P1". Not very useful, but illustrative.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
If you are modifying <code class="filename">process_bug.cgi</code> in any
way, do not change the code that is bounded by DO_NOT_CHANGE blocks.
Doing so could compromise security, or cause your installation to
stop working entirely.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
For a list of possible field names, look at the bugs table in the
database. If you need help writing custom rules for your organization,
ask in the newsgroup.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="integration"></a>6.5. Integrating Bugzilla with Third-Party Tools</h2></div></div></div><p>
Many utilities and applications can integrate with Bugzilla,
either on the client- or server-side. None of them are maintained
by the Bugzilla community, nor are they tested during our
QA tests, so use them at your own risk. They are listed at
<a class="ulink" href="https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Addons" target="_top">https://wiki.mozilla.org/Bugzilla:Addons</a>.
</p></div></div><div class="appendix"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="troubleshooting"></a>Appendix A. Troubleshooting</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#general-advice">A.1. General Advice</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-testserver">A.2. The Apache web server is not serving Bugzilla pages</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-perlmodule">A.3. I installed a Perl module, but
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> claims it's not installed!</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-dbdSponge">A.4. DBD::Sponge::db prepare failed</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#paranoid-security">A.5. cannot chdir(/var/spool/mqueue)</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-relogin-everyone">A.6. Everybody is constantly being forced to relogin</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-index">A.7. <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> doesn't show up unless specified in the URL</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#trbl-passwd-encryption">A.8.
checksetup.pl reports "Client does not support authentication protocol
requested by server..."
</a></span></dt></dl></div><p>This section gives solutions to common Bugzilla installation
problems. If none of the section headings seems to match your
problem, read the general advice.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="general-advice"></a>A.1. General Advice</h2></div></div></div><p>If you can't get <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> to run to
completion, it normally explains what's wrong and how to fix it.
If you can't work it out, or if it's being uncommunicative, post
the errors in the
<a class="ulink" href="news://news.mozilla.org/mozilla.support.bugzilla" target="_top">mozilla.support.bugzilla</a>
newsgroup.
</p><p>If you have made it all the way through
<a class="xref" href="#installation" title="2.1. Installation">Section 2.1, “Installation”</a> (Installation) and
<a class="xref" href="#configuration" title="2.2. Configuration">Section 2.2, “Configuration”</a> (Configuration) but accessing the Bugzilla
URL doesn't work, the first thing to do is to check your web server error
log. For Apache, this is often located at
<code class="filename">/etc/logs/httpd/error_log</code>. The error messages
you see may be self-explanatory enough to enable you to diagnose and
fix the problem. If not, see below for some commonly-encountered
errors. If that doesn't help, post the errors to the newsgroup.
</p><p>
Bugzilla can also log all user-based errors (and many code-based errors)
that occur, without polluting the web server's error log. To enable
Bugzilla error logging, create a file that Bugzilla can write to, named
<code class="filename">errorlog</code>, in the Bugzilla <code class="filename">data</code>
directory. Errors will be logged as they occur, and will include the type
of the error, the IP address and username (if available) of the user who
triggered the error, and the values of all environment variables; if a
form was being submitted, the data in the form will also be included.
To disable error logging, delete or rename the
<code class="filename">errorlog</code> file.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-testserver"></a>A.2. The Apache web server is not serving Bugzilla pages</h2></div></div></div><p>After you have run <span class="command"><strong>checksetup.pl</strong></span> twice,
run <span class="command"><strong>testserver.pl http://yoursite.yourdomain/yoururl</strong></span>
to confirm that your web server is configured properly for
Bugzilla.
</p><pre class="programlisting">
<code class="prompt">bash$</code> ./testserver.pl http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-tip
TEST-OK Webserver is running under group id in $webservergroup.
TEST-OK Got ant picture.
TEST-OK Webserver is executing CGIs.
TEST-OK Webserver is preventing fetch of http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-tip/localconfig.
</pre></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-perlmodule"></a>A.3. I installed a Perl module, but
<code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code> claims it's not installed!</h2></div></div></div><p>This could be caused by one of two things:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>You have two versions of Perl on your machine. You are installing
modules into one, and Bugzilla is using the other. Rerun the CPAN
commands (or manual compile) using the full path to Perl from the
top of <code class="filename">checksetup.pl</code>. This will make sure you
are installing the modules in the right place.
</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The permissions on your library directories are set incorrectly.
They must, at the very least, be readable by the web server user or
group. It is recommended that they be world readable.
</p></li></ol></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-dbdSponge"></a>A.4. DBD::Sponge::db prepare failed</h2></div></div></div><p>The following error message may appear due to a bug in DBD::mysql
(over which the Bugzilla team have no control):
</p><pre class="programlisting"> DBD::Sponge::db prepare failed: Cannot determine NUM_OF_FIELDS at D:/Perl/site/lib/DBD/mysql.pm line 248.
SV = NULL(0x0) at 0x20fc444
REFCNT = 1
FLAGS = (PADBUSY,PADMY)
</pre><p>To fix this, go to
<code class="filename"><path-to-perl>/lib/DBD/sponge.pm</code>
in your Perl installation and replace
</p><pre class="programlisting"> my $numFields;
if ($attribs->{'NUM_OF_FIELDS'}) {
$numFields = $attribs->{'NUM_OF_FIELDS'};
} elsif ($attribs->{'NAME'}) {
$numFields = @{$attribs->{NAME}};
</pre><p>with</p><pre class="programlisting"> my $numFields;
if ($attribs->{'NUM_OF_FIELDS'}) {
$numFields = $attribs->{'NUM_OF_FIELDS'};
} elsif ($attribs->{'NAMES'}) {
$numFields = @{$attribs->{NAMES}};
</pre><p>(note the S added to NAME.)</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="paranoid-security"></a>A.5. cannot chdir(/var/spool/mqueue)</h2></div></div></div><p>If you are installing Bugzilla on SuSE Linux, or some other
distributions with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">paranoid</span>”</span> security options, it is
possible that the checksetup.pl script may fail with the error:
</p><pre class="programlisting">cannot chdir(/var/spool/mqueue): Permission denied
</pre><p>
</p><p>This is because your <code class="filename">/var/spool/mqueue</code>
directory has a mode of <code class="computeroutput">drwx------</code>.
Type <span class="command"><strong>chmod 755 <code class="filename">/var/spool/mqueue</code></strong></span>
as root to fix this problem. This will allow any process running on your
machine the ability to <span class="emphasis"><em>read</em></span> the
<code class="filename">/var/spool/mqueue</code> directory.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-relogin-everyone"></a>A.6. Everybody is constantly being forced to relogin</h2></div></div></div><p>The most-likely cause is that the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">cookiepath</span>”</span> parameter
is not set correctly in the Bugzilla configuration. You can change this (if
you're a Bugzilla administrator) from the editparams.cgi page via the web interface.
</p><p>The value of the cookiepath parameter should be the actual directory
containing your Bugzilla installation, <span class="emphasis"><em>as seen by the end-user's
web browser</em></span>. Leading and trailing slashes are mandatory. You can
also set the cookiepath to any directory which is a parent of the Bugzilla
directory (such as '/', the root directory). But you can't put something
that isn't at least a partial match or it won't work. What you're actually
doing is restricting the end-user's browser to sending the cookies back only
to that directory.
</p><p>How do you know if you want your specific Bugzilla directory or the
whole site?
</p><p>If you have only one Bugzilla running on the server, and you don't
mind having other applications on the same server with it being able to see
the cookies (you might be doing this on purpose if you have other things on
your site that share authentication with Bugzilla), then you'll want to have
the cookiepath set to "/", or to a sufficiently-high enough directory that
all of the involved apps can see the cookies.
</p><div class="example"><a name="trbl-relogin-everyone-share"></a><p class="title"><b>Example A.1. Examples of urlbase/cookiepath pairs for sharing login cookies</b></p><div class="example-contents"><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
urlbase is http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/<br>
cookiepath is /<br>
<br>
urlbase is http://tools.mysite.tld/bugzilla/<br>
but you have http://tools.mysite.tld/someotherapp/ which shares<br>
authentication with your Bugzilla<br>
cookiepath is /<br>
</p></div></blockquote></div></div></div><br class="example-break"><p>On the other hand, if you have more than one Bugzilla running on the
server (some people do - we do on landfill) then you need to have the
cookiepath restricted enough so that the different Bugzillas don't
confuse their cookies with one another.
</p><div class="example"><a name="trbl-relogin-everyone-restrict"></a><p class="title"><b>Example A.2. Examples of urlbase/cookiepath pairs to restrict the login cookie</b></p><div class="example-contents"><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
urlbase is http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-tip/<br>
cookiepath is /bugzilla-tip/<br>
<br>
urlbase is http://landfill.bugzilla.org/bugzilla-4.0-branch/<br>
cookiepath is /bugzilla-4.0-branch/<br>
</p></div></blockquote></div></div></div><br class="example-break"><p>If you had cookiepath set to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">/</span>”</span> at any point in the
past and need to set it to something more restrictive
(i.e. <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">/bugzilla/</span>”</span>), you can safely do this without
requiring users to delete their Bugzilla-related cookies in their
browser (this is true starting with Bugzilla 2.18 and Bugzilla 2.16.5).
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-index"></a>A.7. <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> doesn't show up unless specified in the URL</h2></div></div></div><p>
You probably need to set up your web server in such a way that it
will serve the index.cgi page as an index page.
</p><p>
If you are using Apache, you can do this by adding
<code class="filename">index.cgi</code> to the end of the
<code class="computeroutput">DirectoryIndex</code> line
as mentioned in <a class="xref" href="#http-apache" title="2.2.4.1. Bugzilla using Apache">Section 2.2.4.1, “Bugzilla using Apache”</a>.
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="trbl-passwd-encryption"></a>A.8.
checksetup.pl reports "Client does not support authentication protocol
requested by server..."
</h2></div></div></div><p>
This error is occurring because you are using the new password
encryption that comes with MySQL 4.1, while your
<code class="filename">DBD::mysql</code> module was compiled against an
older version of MySQL. If you recompile <code class="filename">DBD::mysql</code>
against the current MySQL libraries (or just obtain a newer version
of this module) then the error may go away.
</p><p>
If that does not fix the problem, or if you cannot recompile the
existing module (e.g. you're running Windows) and/or don't want to
replace it (e.g. you want to keep using a packaged version), then a
workaround is available from the MySQL docs:
<a class="ulink" href="http://dev.mysql.com/doc/mysql/en/Old_client.html" target="_top">http://dev.mysql.com/doc/mysql/en/Old_client.html</a>
</p></div></div><div class="appendix"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="patches"></a>Appendix B. Contrib</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cmdline">B.1. Command-line Search Interface</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#cmdline-bugmail">B.2. Command-line 'Send Unsent Bug-mail' tool</a></span></dt></dl></div><p>
There are a number of unofficial Bugzilla add-ons in the
<code class="filename">$BUGZILLA_ROOT/contrib/</code>
directory. This section documents them.
</p><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="cmdline"></a>B.1. Command-line Search Interface</h2></div></div></div><p>
There are a suite of Unix utilities for searching Bugzilla from the
command line. They live in the
<code class="filename">contrib/cmdline</code> directory.
There are three files - <code class="filename">query.conf</code>,
<code class="filename">buglist</code> and <code class="filename">bugs</code>.
</p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Warning"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Warning]" src="../images/warning.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
These files pre-date the templatization work done as part of the
2.16 release, and have not been updated.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
<code class="filename">query.conf</code> contains the mapping from
options to field names and comparison types. Quoted option names
are <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">grepped</span>”</span> for, so it should be easy to edit this
file. Comments (#) have no effect; you must make sure these lines
do not contain any quoted <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">option</span>”</span>.
</p><p>
<code class="filename">buglist</code> is a shell script that submits a
Bugzilla query and writes the resulting HTML page to stdout.
It supports both short options, (such as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-Afoo</span>”</span>
or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-Rbar</span>”</span>) and long options (such
as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">--assignedto=foo</span>”</span> or <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">--reporter=bar</span>”</span>).
If the first character of an option is not <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">-</span>”</span>, it is
treated as if it were prefixed with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">--default=</span>”</span>.
</p><p>
The column list is taken from the COLUMNLIST environment variable.
This is equivalent to the <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Change Columns</span>”</span> option
that is available when you list bugs in buglist.cgi. If you have
already used Bugzilla, grep for COLUMNLIST in your cookies file
to see your current COLUMNLIST setting.
</p><p>
<code class="filename">bugs</code> is a simple shell script which calls
<code class="filename">buglist</code> and extracts the
bug numbers from the output. Adding the prefix
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">http://bugzilla.mozilla.org/buglist.cgi?bug_id=</span>”</span>
turns the bug list into a working link if any bugs are found.
Counting bugs is easy. Pipe the results through
<span class="command"><strong>sed -e 's/,/ /g' | wc | awk '{printf $2 "\n"}'</strong></span>
</p><p>
Akkana Peck says she has good results piping
<code class="filename">buglist</code> output through
<span class="command"><strong>w3m -T text/html -dump</strong></span>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="cmdline-bugmail"></a>B.2. Command-line 'Send Unsent Bug-mail' tool</h2></div></div></div><p>
Within the <code class="filename">contrib</code> directory
exists a utility with the descriptive (if compact) name
of <code class="filename">sendunsentbugmail.pl</code>. The purpose of this
script is, simply, to send out any bug-related mail that should
have been sent by now, but for one reason or another has not.
</p><p>
To accomplish this task, <code class="filename">sendunsentbugmail.pl</code> uses
the same mechanism as the <code class="filename">sanitycheck.cgi</code> script;
it scans through the entire database looking for bugs with changes that
were made more than 30 minutes ago, but where there is no record of
anyone related to that bug having been sent mail. Having compiled a list,
it then uses the standard rules to determine who gets mail, and sends it
out.
</p><p>
As the script runs, it indicates the bug for which it is currently
sending mail; when it has finished, it gives a numerical count of how
many mails were sent and how many people were excluded. (Individual
user names are not recorded or displayed.) If the script produces
no output, that means no unsent mail was detected.
</p><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Usage</em></span>: move the sendunsentbugmail.pl script
up into the main directory, ensure it has execute permission, and run it
from the command line (or from a cron job) with no parameters.
</p></div></div><div class="appendix"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="install-perlmodules-manual"></a>Appendix C. Manual Installation of Perl Modules</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-instructions">C.1. Instructions</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-download">C.2. Download Locations</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#modules-manual-optional">C.3. Optional Modules</a></span></dt></dl></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="modules-manual-instructions"></a>C.1. Instructions</h2></div></div></div><p>
If you need to install Perl modules manually, here's how it's done.
Download the module using the link given in the next section, and then
apply this magic incantation, as root:
</p><p>
</p><pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">bash#</code> tar -xzvf <module>.tar.gz
<code class="prompt">bash#</code> cd <module>
<code class="prompt">bash#</code> perl Makefile.PL
<code class="prompt">bash#</code> make
<code class="prompt">bash#</code> make test
<code class="prompt">bash#</code> make install</pre><p>
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
In order to compile source code under Windows you will need to obtain
a 'make' utility. The <span class="command"><strong>nmake</strong></span> utility provided with
Microsoft Visual C++ may be used. As an alternative, there is a
utility called <span class="command"><strong>dmake</strong></span> available from CPAN which is
written entirely in Perl.
</p><p>
As described in <a class="xref" href="#modules-manual-download" title="C.2. Download Locations">Section C.2, “Download Locations”</a>, however, most
packages already exist and are available from ActiveState or theory58S.
We highly recommend that you install them using the ppm GUI available with
ActiveState and to add the theory58S repository to your list of repositories.
</p></td></tr></table></div></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="modules-manual-download"></a>C.2. Download Locations</h2></div></div></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>
Running Bugzilla on Windows requires the use of ActiveState
Perl 5.8.1 or higher. Many modules already exist in the core
distribution of ActiveState Perl. If some modules are missing, upgrade
ActiveState Perl to at least 5.12; it has all the required modules.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
CGI:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/CGI.pm/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/CGI.pm/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://perldoc.perl.org/CGI.html" target="_top">http://perldoc.perl.org/CGI.html</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
Data-Dumper:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Data-Dumper/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Data-Dumper/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Data-Dumper/Dumper.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Data-Dumper/Dumper.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
Date::Format (part of TimeDate):
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/TimeDate/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/TimeDate/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/TimeDate/lib/Date/Format.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/TimeDate/lib/Date/Format.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
DBI:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBI/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBI/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://dbi.perl.org/docs/" target="_top">http://dbi.perl.org/docs/</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
DBD::mysql:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-mysql/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-mysql/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-mysql/lib/DBD/mysql.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-mysql/lib/DBD/mysql.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
DBD::Pg:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-Pg/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-Pg/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-Pg/Pg.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/DBD-Pg/Pg.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
Template-Toolkit:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Template-Toolkit/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Template-Toolkit/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://www.template-toolkit.org/docs.html" target="_top">http://www.template-toolkit.org/docs.html</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
GD:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GD/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GD/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GD/GD.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GD/GD.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
Template::Plugin::GD:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Template-GD/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Template-GD/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://www.template-toolkit.org/docs/aqua/Modules/index.html" target="_top">http://www.template-toolkit.org/docs/aqua/Modules/index.html</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
MIME::Parser (part of MIME-tools):
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/MIME-tools/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/MIME-tools/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/MIME-tools/lib/MIME/Parser.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/MIME-tools/lib/MIME/Parser.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="modules-manual-optional"></a>C.3. Optional Modules</h2></div></div></div><p>
Chart::Lines:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Chart/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Chart/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Chart/Chart.pod" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/Chart/Chart.pod</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
GD::Graph:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDGraph/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDGraph/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDGraph/Graph.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDGraph/Graph.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
GD::Text::Align (part of GD::Text::Util):
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDTextUtil/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDTextUtil/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDTextUtil/Text/Align.pm" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/GDTextUtil/Text/Align.pm</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
XML::Twig:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/XML-Twig/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/dist/XML-Twig/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://standards.ieee.org/resources/spasystem/twig/twig_stable.html" target="_top">http://standards.ieee.org/resources/spasystem/twig/twig_stable.html</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p><p>
PatchReader:
</p><div class="literallayout"><p><br>
CPAN Download Page: <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/author/JKEISER/PatchReader/" target="_top">http://search.cpan.org/author/JKEISER/PatchReader/</a><br>
Documentation: <a class="ulink" href="http://www.johnkeiser.com/mozilla/Patch_Viewer.html" target="_top">http://www.johnkeiser.com/mozilla/Patch_Viewer.html</a><br>
</p></div><p>
</p></div></div><div class="appendix"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="gfdl"></a>Appendix D. GNU Free Documentation License</h1></div></div></div><div class="toc"><p><b>Table of Contents</b></p><dl class="toc"><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-0">D.0. Preamble</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-1">D.1. Applicability and Definition</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-2">D.2. Verbatim Copying</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-3">D.3. Copying in Quantity</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-4">D.4. Modifications</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-5">D.5. Combining Documents</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-6">D.6. Collections of Documents</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-7">D.7. Aggregation with Independent Works</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-8">D.8. Translation</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-9">D.9. Termination</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-10">D.10. Future Revisions of this License</a></span></dt><dt><span class="section"><a href="#gfdl-howto">D.. How to use this License for your documents</a></span></dt></dl></div><p>Version 1.1, March 2000</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>Copyright (C) 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and
distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.</p></blockquote></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-0"></a>D.0. Preamble</h2></div></div></div><p>The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the
effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying
it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License
preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their
work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by
others.</p><p>This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license
designed for free software.</p><p>We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it
can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether
it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally
for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-1"></a>D.1. Applicability and Definition</h2></div></div></div><p>This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under
the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to any such
manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed
as "you".</p><p>A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.</p><p>A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject
(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a
textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any
mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection
with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.</p><p>The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
notice that says that the Document is released under this License.</p><p>The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says
that the Document is released under this License.</p><p>A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the general
public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for
automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text
formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose
markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification
by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called
"Opaque".</p><p>Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or
XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML
designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF,
proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word
processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not
generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
processors for output purposes only.</p><p>The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats
which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means the text
near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the
beginning of the body of the text.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-2"></a>D.2. Verbatim Copying</h2></div></div></div><p>You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to
the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical
measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the
copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in
exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies
you must also follow the conditions in section 3.</p><p>You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
and you may publicly display copies.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-3"></a>D.3. Copying in Quantity</h2></div></div></div><p>If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these
Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts
on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you
as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full
title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may
add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes
limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document
and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other
respects.</p><p>If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably)
on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.</p><p>If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each
Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a
complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which
the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter
option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin
distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this
Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until
at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy
(directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the
public.</p><p>It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to
give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
Document.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-4"></a>D.4. Modifications</h2></div></div></div><p>You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and
modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it.
In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="A"><li class="listitem"><p>Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History
section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous
version if the original publisher of that version gives
permission.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal
authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less
than five).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
Modified Version, as the publisher.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
adjacent to the other copyright notices.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under
the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum
below.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license
notice.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Include an unaltered copy of this License.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one
stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
Version as stated in the previous sentence.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it
was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. You may
omit a network location for a work that was published at least four
years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the
version it refers to gives permission.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
dedications given therein.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent
are not considered part of the section titles.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Delete any section entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may
not be included in the Modified Version.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to
conflict in title with any Invariant Section.</p></li></ol></div><p>If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of
these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of
Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles
must be distinct from any other section titles.</p><p>You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for
example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by
an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.</p><p>You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the
list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through
arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a
cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement
made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add
another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the
previous publisher that added the old one.</p><p>The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert
or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-5"></a>D.5. Combining Documents</h2></div></div></div><p>You may combine the Document with other documents released under
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list
them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license
notice.</p><p>The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy.
If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different
contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end
of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of
that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment
to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license
notice of the combined work.</p><p>In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section entitled
"History"; likewise combine any sections entitled "Acknowledgements", and
any sections entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
entitled "Endorsements."</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-6"></a>D.6. Collections of Documents</h2></div></div></div><p>You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies
of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is
included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this
License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other
respects.</p><p>You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy
of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in
all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-7"></a>D.7. Aggregation with Independent Works</h2></div></div></div><p>A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified
Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for
the compilation. Such a compilation is called an "aggregate", and this
License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled
with the Document, on account of their being thus compiled, if they are
not themselves derivative works of the Document.</p><p>If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of
the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers
that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must
appear on covers around the whole aggregate.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-8"></a>D.8. Translation</h2></div></div></div><p>Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations
of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of
these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License
provided that you also include the original English version of this
License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the
original English version of this License, the original English version
will prevail.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-9"></a>D.9. Termination</h2></div></div></div><p>You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties
who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-10"></a>D.10. Future Revisions of this License</h2></div></div></div><p>The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
detail to address new problems or concerns. See
<a class="ulink" href="http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/" target="_top">http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/</a>.</p><p>Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of
this License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of
any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft)
by the Free Software Foundation.</p></div><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both"><a name="gfdl-howto"></a>D.. How to use this License for your documents</h2></div></div></div><p>To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy
of the License in the document and put the following copyright and
license notices just after the title page:</p><div class="blockquote"><blockquote class="blockquote"><p>Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy,
distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free
Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by
the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST
THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the
Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the
section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".</p></blockquote></div><p>If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant
Sections" instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no
Front-Cover Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover
Texts being LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.</p><p>If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their
use in free software.</p></div></div><div class="glossary"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title"><a name="glossary"></a>Glossary</h1></div></div></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">0-9, high ascii</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-htaccess"></a><span class="glossterm">.htaccess</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>Apache web server, and other NCSA-compliant web servers,
observe the convention of using files in directories called
<code class="filename">.htaccess</code>
to restrict access to certain files. In Bugzilla, they are used
to keep secret files which would otherwise
compromise your installation - e.g. the
<code class="filename">localconfig</code>
file contains the password to your database.
curious.</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">A</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-apache"></a><span class="glossterm">Apache</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>In this context, Apache is the web server most commonly used
for serving up Bugzilla
pages. Contrary to popular belief, the apache web server has nothing
to do with the ancient and noble Native American tribe, but instead
derived its name from the fact that it was
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">a patchy</span>”</span>
version of the original
<acronym class="acronym">NCSA</acronym>
world-wide-web server.</p><div class="variablelist"><p class="title"><b>Useful Directives when configuring Bugzilla</b></p><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput"><a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.0/mod/mod_mime.html#addhandler" target="_top">AddHandler</a></code></span></dt><dd><p>Tell Apache that it's OK to run CGI scripts.</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput"><a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/core.html#allowoverride" target="_top">AllowOverride</a></code>, </span><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput"><a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/core.html#options" target="_top">Options</a></code></span></dt><dd><p>These directives are used to tell Apache many things about
the directory they apply to. For Bugzilla's purposes, we need
them to allow script execution and <code class="filename">.htaccess</code>
overrides.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput"><a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/mod_dir.html#directoryindex" target="_top">DirectoryIndex</a></code></span></dt><dd><p>Used to tell Apache what files are indexes. If you can
not add <code class="filename">index.cgi</code> to the list of valid files,
you'll need to set <code class="computeroutput">$index_html</code> to
1 in <code class="filename">localconfig</code> so
<span class="command"><strong>./checksetup.pl</strong></span> will create an
<code class="filename">index.html</code> that redirects to
<code class="filename">index.cgi</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="computeroutput"><a class="ulink" href="http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/core.html#scriptinterpretersource" target="_top">ScriptInterpreterSource</a></code></span></dt><dd><p>Used when running Apache on windows so the shebang line
doesn't have to be changed in every Bugzilla script.
</p></dd></dl></div><p>For more information about how to configure Apache for Bugzilla,
see <a class="xref" href="#http-apache" title="2.2.4.1. Bugzilla using Apache">Section 2.2.4.1, “Bugzilla using Apache”</a>.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">B</h3><dl><dt><span class="glossterm">Bug</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">bug</span>”</span>
in Bugzilla refers to an issue entered into the database which has an
associated number, assignments, comments, etc. Some also refer to a
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">tickets</span>”</span>
or
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">issues</span>”</span>;
in the context of Bugzilla, they are synonymous.</p></dd><dt><span class="glossterm">Bug Number</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>Each Bugzilla bug is assigned a number that uniquely identifies
that bug. The bug associated with a bug number can be pulled up via a
query, or easily from the very front page by typing the number in the
"Find" box.</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-bugzilla"></a><span class="glossterm">Bugzilla</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>Bugzilla is the world-leading free software bug tracking system.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">C</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-cgi"></a><span class="glossterm">Common Gateway Interface</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p><acronym class="acronym">CGI</acronym> is an acronym for Common Gateway Interface. This is
a standard for interfacing an external application with a web server. Bugzilla
is an example of a <acronym class="acronym">CGI</acronym> application.
</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-component"></a><span class="glossterm">Component</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A Component is a subsection of a Product. It should be a narrow
category, tailored to your organization. All Products must contain at
least one Component (and, as a matter of fact, creating a Product
with no Components will create an error in Bugzilla).</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-cpan"></a><span class="glossterm">Comprehensive Perl Archive Network</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>
<acronym class="acronym">CPAN</acronym>
stands for the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Comprehensive Perl Archive Network</span>”</span>.
CPAN maintains a large number of extremely useful
<em class="glossterm">Perl</em>
modules - encapsulated chunks of code for performing a
particular task.</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-contrib"></a><span class="glossterm"><code class="filename">contrib</code></span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>The <code class="filename">contrib</code> directory is
a location to put scripts that have been contributed to Bugzilla but
are not a part of the official distribution. These scripts are written
by third parties and may be in languages other than perl. For those
that are in perl, there may be additional modules or other requirements
than those of the official distribution.
</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 1em; margin-right: 1em"><table border="0" summary="Note"><tr><td rowspan="2" align="center" valign="top" width="25"><img alt="[Note]" src="../images/note.gif"></td><th align="left"></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top"><p>Scripts in the <code class="filename">contrib</code>
directory are not officially supported by the Bugzilla team and may
break in between versions.
</p></td></tr></table></div><p>
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">D</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-daemon"></a><span class="glossterm">daemon</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A daemon is a computer program which runs in the background. In
general, most daemons are started at boot time via System V init
scripts, or through RC scripts on BSD-based systems.
<em class="glossterm">mysqld</em>,
the MySQL server, and
<em class="glossterm">apache</em>,
a web server, are generally run as daemons.</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-dos"></a><span class="glossterm">DOS Attack</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A DOS, or Denial of Service attack, is when a user attempts to
deny access to a web server by repeatedly accessing a page or sending
malformed requests to a webserver. A D-DOS, or
Distributed Denial of Service attack, is when these requests come
from multiple sources at the same time. Unfortunately, these are much
more difficult to defend against.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">G</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-groups"></a><span class="glossterm">Groups</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>The word
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Groups</span>”</span>
has a very special meaning to Bugzilla. Bugzilla's main security
mechanism comes by placing users in groups, and assigning those
groups certain privileges to view bugs in particular
<em class="glossterm">Products</em>
in the
<em class="glossterm">Bugzilla</em>
database.</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">J</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-javascript"></a><span class="glossterm">JavaScript</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>JavaScript is cool, we should talk about it.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">M</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-mta"></a><span class="glossterm">Message Transport Agent</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A Message Transport Agent is used to control the flow of email on a system.
The <a class="ulink" href="http://search.cpan.org/dist/Email-Send/lib/Email/Send.pm" target="_top">Email::Send</a>
Perl module, which Bugzilla uses to send email, can be configured to
use many different underlying implementations for actually sending the
mail using the <code class="option">mail_delivery_method</code> parameter.
</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-mysql"></a><span class="glossterm">MySQL</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>MySQL is one of the supported
<a class="glossterm" href="#gloss-rdbms"><em class="glossterm">RDBMS</em></a> for Bugzilla. MySQL
can be downloaded from <a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com" target="_top">http://www.mysql.com</a>. While you
should familiarize yourself with all of the documentation, some high
points are:
</p><div class="variablelist"><dl class="variablelist"><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Backup.html" target="_top">Backup</a></span></dt><dd><p>Methods for backing up your Bugzilla database.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Option_files.html" target="_top">Option Files</a></span></dt><dd><p>Information about how to configure MySQL using
<code class="filename">my.cnf</code>.
</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="http://www.mysql.com/doc/en/Privilege_system.html" target="_top">Privilege System</a></span></dt><dd><p>Information about how to protect your MySQL server.
</p></dd></dl></div></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">P</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-ppm"></a><span class="glossterm">Perl Package Manager</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p><a class="ulink" href="http://aspn.activestate.com/ASPN/Downloads/ActivePerl/PPM/" target="_top">http://aspn.activestate.com/ASPN/Downloads/ActivePerl/PPM/</a>
</p></dd><dt><span class="glossterm"><a name="gloss-product"></a>Product</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A Product is a broad category of types of bugs, normally
representing a single piece of software or entity. In general,
there are several Components to a Product. A Product may define a
group (used for security) for all bugs entered into
its Components.</p></dd><dt><span class="glossterm">Perl</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>First written by Larry Wall, Perl is a remarkable program
language. It has the benefits of the flexibility of an interpreted
scripting language (such as shell script), combined with the speed
and power of a compiled language, such as C.
<em class="glossterm">Bugzilla</em>
is maintained in Perl.</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">Q</h3><dl><dt><span class="glossterm">QA</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">QA</span>”</span>,
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Q/A</span>”</span>, and
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Q.A.</span>”</span>
are short for
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Quality Assurance</span>”</span>.
In most large software development organizations, there is a team
devoted to ensuring the product meets minimum standards before
shipping. This team will also generally want to track the progress of
bugs over their life cycle, thus the need for the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">QA Contact</span>”</span>
field in a bug.</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">R</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-rdbms"></a><span class="glossterm">Relational DataBase Management System</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A relational database management system is a database system
that stores information in tables that are related to each other.
</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-regexp"></a><span class="glossterm">Regular Expression</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>A regular expression is an expression used for pattern matching.
<a class="ulink" href="http://perldoc.com/perl5.6/pod/perlre.html#Regular-Expressions" target="_top">Documentation</a>
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">S</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-service"></a><span class="glossterm">Service</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>In Windows NT environment, a boot-time background application
is referred to as a service. These are generally managed through the
control panel while logged in as an account with
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Administrator</span>”</span> level capabilities. For more
information, consult your Windows manual or the MSKB.
</p></dd><dt><span class="glossterm">
<acronym class="acronym">SGML</acronym>
</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>
<acronym class="acronym">SGML</acronym>
stands for
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">Standard Generalized Markup Language</span>”</span>.
Created in the 1980's to provide an extensible means to maintain
documentation based upon content instead of presentation,
<acronym class="acronym">SGML</acronym>
has withstood the test of time as a robust, powerful language.
<em class="glossterm">
<acronym class="acronym">XML</acronym>
</em>
is the
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">baby brother</span>”</span>
of SGML; any valid
<acronym class="acronym">XML</acronym>
document it, by definition, a valid
<acronym class="acronym">SGML</acronym>
document. The document you are reading is written and maintained in
<acronym class="acronym">SGML</acronym>,
and is also valid
<acronym class="acronym">XML</acronym>
if you modify the Document Type Definition.</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">T</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-target-milestone"></a><span class="glossterm">Target Milestone</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>Target Milestones are Product goals. They are configurable on a
per-Product basis. Most software development houses have a concept of
<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">milestones</span>”</span>
where the people funding a project expect certain functionality on
certain dates. Bugzilla facilitates meeting these milestones by
giving you the ability to declare by which milestone a bug will be
fixed, or an enhancement will be implemented.</p></dd><dt><a name="gloss-tcl"></a><span class="glossterm">Tool Command Language</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>TCL is an open source scripting language available for Windows,
Macintosh, and Unix based systems. Bugzilla 1.0 was written in TCL but
never released. The first release of Bugzilla was 2.0, which was when
it was ported to perl.
</p></dd></dl></div><div class="glossdiv"><h3 class="title">Z</h3><dl><dt><a name="gloss-zarro"></a><span class="glossterm">Zarro Boogs Found</span></dt><dd class="glossdef"><p>This is just a goofy way of saying that there were no bugs
found matching your query. When asked to explain this message,
Terry had the following to say:
</p><div class="blockquote"><table border="0" class="blockquote" style="width: 100%; cellspacing: 0; cellpadding: 0;" summary="Block quote"><tr><td width="10%" valign="top"> </td><td width="80%" valign="top"><p>I've been asked to explain this ... way back when, when
Netscape released version 4.0 of its browser, we had a release
party. Naturally, there had been a big push to try and fix every
known bug before the release. Naturally, that hadn't actually
happened. (This is not unique to Netscape or to 4.0; the same thing
has happened with every software project I've ever seen.) Anyway,
at the release party, T-shirts were handed out that said something
like "Netscape 4.0: Zarro Boogs". Just like the software, the
T-shirt had no known bugs. Uh-huh.
</p><p>So, when you query for a list of bugs, and it gets no results,
you can think of this as a friendly reminder. Of *course* there are
bugs matching your query, they just aren't in the bugsystem yet...
</p></td><td width="10%" valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td width="10%" valign="top"> </td><td colspan="2" align="right" valign="top">--<span class="attribution">Terry Weissman</span></td></tr></table></div></dd></dl></div></div></div></body></html>
